networking manualws1.necii.com/support/downloads/aspire/software/0893207_rev3.pdf · about aspire...

Empowered by Innovation

Networking Manual

P/N 0893207

Rev 3, June 2006Printed in U.S.A.

5.24

Technical Support Web Site: http://ws1.necii.com (registration is required)

This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers andservice personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Anycomments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.

4 Forest ParkwayShelton, CT 06484

necunifiedsolutions.com

Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, orrepresentation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice andNEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, NECUnified Solutions, Inc. also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design orcomponents as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in allrespects and NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall NEC UnifiedSolutions, Inc. be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. Thisdocument contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of thisdocument may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.

©2006 by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.Printed in U.S.A.

Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1About Aspire Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

What is Networking? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Aspire Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Available Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Available Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Using This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Unique Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Setting Up The Networking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11Required System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Basic System Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11ISDN Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12IP Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Multi-Site Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37911 Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

911 Call Routing : Using ARS Class of Service Matching to Call Local Authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40BLF Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Barge In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Call Forward, Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Call Forwarding with Follow Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Call Waiting / Camp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Call Waiting / Camp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Caller ID Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Central Office Calls, Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Central Office Calls, Placing: Seizing a trunk in a networked system . . . . . . . 57Channel Release Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Department Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Department Step Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Direct Inward Dialing (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Direct Inward Line (DIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Fax Over Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Aspire Networking Manual ◆ Table of Contents- 1

Table of Contents

Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Hotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Keep Alive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Operator, Centralized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Ringdown Extension, Internal/External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Voice Mail, Centralized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Voice Mail, Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Before Reading This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101How to Use This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101How to Enter the Programming Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102How to Exit the Programming Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Programming Names and Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Programming Names and Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Using Soft Keys For Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108What the Soft Key Display Prompts Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

10-03 : PCB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

10-27 : IP System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Table of Contents - 2 ◆ Aspire Networking Manual

Table of Contents

10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

11-01 : System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

11-02 : Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161


Table of Contents

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

20-01 : System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184


Table of Contents

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

26-04 : ARS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205


Table of Contents

44-06 : Additional Dial Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

84-04 : VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

84-05 : VOIPU IP Address Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

84-06 : VOIPU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232


Table of Contents

84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Feature Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Telephone Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Aspire Networking Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

ISDN Networking Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238VoIP Networking Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Multi-Site Networking Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243


Table of Contents


Introduction

About Aspire Networking

Introduction

About Aspire Networking

Introduction

What is Networking?The Aspire Networking package provides a seamless connection of multiple systems into a single �virtual� communications system using ISDN (PRI/BRI) and VoIP lines with a uniÞed numbering plan. The ISDN Networking is only available with the Aspire M/L//XL - Aspire S must use IP Networking. Aspire Networking will allow many companies to connect their telephone systems so they appear as one. This will give them the ability to have only one operator to manage the system and share one voice mail within the network. An extension user in the network can easily dial another extension or transfer a call within the Aspire Networking System. Calls are passed from network node to network node using a protocol that contains information about the source of the call, the type of call and the destination of the call.

● Centralized Voice MailCentralized Voice Mail allows multiple networked systems to share a single voice mail sys-tem. This centralized voice mail can receive calls from and transfer calls to any destination in any network node. Unanswered calls recall and route as if they were part of a single, much larger system.

● Centralized Operator Centralized Operator allows multiple networked systems to share a single operator. The oper-ator can be accessed by a single digit code - if the operator is busy your call will automatically queue until the operator becomes free. The operator can have a DSS console to show the sta-tus of users anywhere in the network.

This centralized operator can receive calls from and transfer calls to any destination in any net-work node. Unanswered calls recall and route as if they were part of a single, much larger system.

● Flexible Network RoutingUse network routes to set up �single channel� networking between many separate systems - or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance. Data tables in the system program deÞne the routing for each extension in each network node. These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking conÞguration.

Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call to any extension at any location by simply dialing an extension number. The system analyses each extension number received and deter-mines how to route the call to its Þnal destination. The feature that handles this route selection is called Flexible Routing (F-Routing). Once an extension number is dialed, the system checks the routing, accesses the assigned trunk group and places the call. Each extension is assigned a route or routes that decides which trunk group to access and any modiÞed dialed data if required.

Networking ◆ 1

IntroductionAbout Aspire Networking

● Busy Lamp IndicationThe status of an extension will be shown at a Hotline key/DSS Console on another networked system. This allows a Centralized Operator to have lamp indication of extensions in the net-work or an extension user to have a Hotline key for a co-worker on another system.

● Call ForwardingYou can forward your calls to an extension at another networked extension. If you visit another site within your network but forgot to set a call forward. then use Follow Me to have your calls forwarded to you. Follow Me is also useful if you have an Aspire Wireless handset. If your handset is subscribed at the site you are visiting then you can use Follow Me to have your calls forwarded to your Aspire Wireless handset.

● ConferenceAn extension can have a conference call that includes co-workers at another system within the network.

● Direct Inward Dial (DID)A DID call can be routed to any extension within the network. This allows an extension to receive a DID call from any other system in the network. Along with trunk access, it is possi-ble for an extension on a system that has no trunk lines to use the trunks of another system in the network.

● ARS/Flexible Network RoutingUse network routes to set up �single channel� networking between many separate systems - or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance. Data tables in the system program deÞne the routing for each extension in each network node. These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking conÞguration.

Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call to any extension at any location by simply dialing an extension number. The system analyzes each extension number received and deter-mines how to route the call to its Þnal destination. There are two types of programming which can handle this route selection - ARS and Flexible Routing (F-Routing). Up to 48 routes are available for networking. Once an extension number is dialed, the system checks the routing, accesses the assigned trunk group and places the call. Each extension is assigned a route or routes that decides which trunk group to access and any modiÞed dialed data if required.

● PagingNetworking allows a user to place a Paging call to a networked system. If you need to get through to a co-worker who is not at their desk, a page can be made to their system.

● Trunk AccessAn extension can access a trunk line at another system in the network. The user dials the stan-dard trunk access code and the system will automatically route the call to the system that has trunks connected.

2 ◆ Networking


Aspire RequirementsThere are two methods available for Networking connections as shown in following table.

Aspire S Requirements● IP Networking is supported by the Aspire S KSU.

● An ENTU LAN Connection PCB is required with the VOIPU PCB. The system will not start up if the ENTU is not installed.

● A VOIPU PCB with an ethernet connection to the ENTU PCB is required for connection.

Aspire NTCPU Requirements● Networking is not supported on the 64-port Basic NTCPU (P/N 0891002).

● A Feature Upgrade PAL chip (P/N 0891039) is required for the Basic NTCPU or an Enhanced NTCPU (P/N 0891038) can be used to enable Networking.

● A PRIU (Þrmware 2.0 or higher), BRIU (Þrmware 2.6 or higher), or VOIPU PCB with an eth-ernet connection to the NTCPU is required for connection.

Interface Description Comments

ISDN

(PRI ISDN available with Aspire M/L/XL Only)

Using Q.931-based proprietary protocol, Basic Rate Interface and Primary Rate Interfaces are available.

� A PRIU or BRIU PCB is required for eachnetwork connection.

� A minimum version of Þrmware is required for the ISDN PCB. BRIU PCB - Firmware 2.6 PRIU PCB - Firmware 2.0

� Using ISDN Networking the system provides up to 256 B-channel ports which can be used for Networking.

� A PRIU circuit will take 24 ports and each BRI circuit will take 2 ports.

� These ISDN Networking ports are indepen-dent of the trunk and station ports available on the system.

VoIP Using H.323 protocol for voice transmit protocol.

� A VOIPU PCB is required, as well as an ethernet connection to the NTCPU.

� No speciÞc Þrmware version required.� Using IP Networking the maximum quantity

of simultaneous calls is limited by the avail-ability of resources on the VOIPU PCB�s installed. A maximum of sixteen 16VOIPU PCB�s can be installed each with a 16 port expansion daughter card giving a maximum of 512 speech channels (this number depends on the system and the NTCPU type).

� The maximum quantity of calls may also be reduced by the compression mode (CODEC type) of the VOIPU PCBs, this is selectable by the installer in Program 84-12-28. Refer to the Aspire IP Manual for further detail.

Networking ◆ 3


Networking Software LevelsIt is advisable to have compatible levels of Aspire software installed on all systems within the Net-work. Although the basic Networking operation will operate correctly, there could be problems with features that are only available from a given level of software.

Aspire Software V2.01● Two Aspire systems can be installed in the network.

● Networked Park Hold should not be used.

Aspire Software V2.5x● More than two Aspire systems can be installed in the network.

The networked systems can use a combination of PRI, BRI or VoIP PCBs. Refer to Networking Using Mixed PCBs (PRI, BRI or VoIP) (page 4).

● For Networks with more than 10 systems.

● Networked Park Hold should not be used.

How Many Aspires can be Installed in a Single Network?The Aspire system software version 2.5x allows you to install up to 10 Aspires within the network. With software prior to version 2.5x, you should not install more than two systems in a network.

All systems must have either the 64-port NTCPU with Feature Upgrade PAL (P/N 0891002 and 0891039) or the Enhanced NTCPU (P/N 0891038) installed and version 2.5x software or later is recommended.

Refer to Multi-Site Networking in this manual for information on installing more than two Aspire systems in a network.

Networking Using Mixed PCBs (PRI, BRI or VoIP)A network can consist of a combination of VOIPU, PRI and BRI PCBs. In order to create a network using mixed media, you must keep a direct connection between the systems. IP resources will receive priority over ISDN resources in a mixed media network. Refer to the following mixed media examples:

Networking via IP and ISDN (as a backup for extra resources)

This connection will work because each system is connected via the VOIPU and PRI/BRI PCBs. The IP resources will get priority. The PRI resources will be selected when the IP resources are in use or unavailable.

Aspire A Aspire B

Hub

VOIPU VOIPU

CSU

PRI PRI

4 ◆ Networking


Multi-Site Networking via IP and ISDN

This connection will NOT work because System C cannot access System A.

Multi-Site Networking via IP and ISDN

This connection will work as all systems are inter-connected. The IP resources will get priority when System A accesses System B. When System A access System C, a PRI resource will be used. In this setup, System A and System B must each have 1 VOIPU and 2 PRIU PCBs. System C must have 2 PRIU PCBs.

Aspire A Aspire B

Hub

VOIPU VOIPU

Aspire C

PRI/BRI

CSUPRI/BRI

Aspire A Aspire B

Hub

VOIPU VOIPU

Aspire C

PRI

CSUPRI

CSU

PRI PRI

PRI

CSUPRI

Networking ◆ 5

IntroductionAvailable Features

Available Features

Available FeaturesFeature Name

911 Call Routing : Using ARS Class of Service Matching to Call Local Authorities (page 39)

ARS/F-Route (page 40)

Barge In (page 47)

BLF Indication (at Hotline / DSS Console key) - refer to Hotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 72)

Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override (page 50)

Caller ID Display (page 56)

Call Forwarding (page 48): Immediately Busy No Answer Both Ring

Call Forwarding with Follow Me (page 52)

Call Forward, Off-Premise (page 51)

Call Waiting / Camp On (page 53)

Callback (page 54)

Central OfÞce Calls, Placing: Seizing a trunk in a networked system (page 57)

Channel Release Link (page 59)

Conference (page 60)

Department Calling (page 62)

Department Step Call (page 64)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) (page 65)

Direct Inward Line (DIL) (page 66)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) (page 67)

Fax Over Networking (page 69)

Hold (page 71)

Hotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS) (page 72)

Intercom (page 74): Change Voice/Signal Ring

Keep Alive Operation (page 75)

Last Number Redial (page 76)

Message Waiting (page 77)

Operator, Centralized (page 78)

Paging (page 79)

Park (page 81)

Ringdown Extension, Internal/External (page 83)

6 ◆ Networking

IntroductionAvailable Features

Selectable Display Messaging (page 84)

Toll Restriction (page 85)

Transfer (page 86)

Voice Mail, Centralized (page 89)

Voice Mail, Local (page 93)

Networking ◆ 7

IntroductionAbout This Manual

About This Manual

Using This Manual This manual is in three sections:

● Section 1: Setting Up the Networking FeatureThis section guides you step by step in setting up a basic Networking system. You'll learn how to:

● Program the Aspire system for Networking

● Program the Aspire system for Networking with Voice Mail

● Set Up the Voice Mail for Networking

● Section 2: Features This section provides details on system features and how they work with a networked system.

● Section 3: Programming BasicsThis section describes the programming basics for the Aspire phone system.

Telephone Programming Instructions shows you how to enter the program�s data into sys-tem memory. For example:

1. Enter the programming mode.

2. 15-07-01

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you�ll see the message �15-07-01 TEL301� on the Þrst line of the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for extension 301. The second row of the display �KY01 = *01� indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of *01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, see How to Enter the Programming Mode (page 102).

● Appendix: Examples of Aspire Networking ConÞgurations This section shows diagrams and simple programming instructions for Aspire Networking.

15-07-01 TEL301KY01 = *01 ←←←← →→→→

8 ◆ Networking


Unique Considerations

Simplifying Keyset Operation with One-Touch Keys...A system phone user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g., Service Code *0 answers a Message Waiting from a co-worker). To streamline the operation of their phone, a keyset user can store these codes under One-Touch Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To Þnd out more, read the One-Touch Calling feature in your Software Manual.

Programmable Keys... When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar to (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 06). This means that the key requires function code 06, and you can program this code through Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code 851. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature in your Software Manual if you need more information.

Using Handsfree...The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just press a line key or CALL key to answer or place a call. For extensions without Automatic Handsfree, the user must: Lift the handset or press SPK for Intercom dial tone.Lift the handset or press SPK, then press a line key for trunk dial tone.

◆ Read These Notes ◆

Networking ◆ 9


- For Your Notes -

10 ◆ Networking

Setting Up The Networking FeatureRequired System Programming

Setting Up The Networking Feature

Required System Programming

Section 1

Setting Up

The Networking Feature

Basic System ProgrammingThe selection of an ISDN PRI, BRI, or VoIP PCB determines the type of programming you must do on the Aspire. Refer to the ISDN Networking, VoIP Networking, or Multi-Site Networking section which follows. You can also refer to the examples in the Appendix (page 237).

In addition to the programs detailed in this manual for the Networking feature, be sure to refer to the Aspire Software Manual (P/N 0893200) for complete details on programming the ISDN or VoIP features, as well as any other user features.

Networking ◆ 11

Setting Up The Networking FeatureISDN Networking

ISDN Networking

ISDN NetworkingRefer to Appendix (page 237) for an example of setting up a network using ISDN or

IP connections.ISDN Networking is only available for the Aspire M/L/XL system. In addition, the

NTCPU must have a Feature Upgrade or Enhanced PAL chip installed.

Using Q.931-based proprietary protocol, Basic Rate Interface and Primary Rate Interfaces are available for networking Aspire systems. PRI ISDN available with Aspire M/L/XL only. Using ISDN Networking, the system provides up to 256 B-channel ports which can be used for Network-ing. One PRIU or BRIU PCB is required for connection to each networked system. A minimum version of Þrmware is required for the ISDN PCB.

BRIU PCB - Firmware 2.6PRIU PCB - Firmware 2.0

A PRIU circuit will take 24 ports and each BRI circuit will take 2 ports. These ISDN Networking ports are independent of the trunk and station ports available on the system.

Telco Requirements

BRI● Peer-to-Peer● U-Point to Telco● NI1/NI2 (National Standard 1 and 2) Compliant● The system provides compatibility with ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) services, including:

· Basic BRI Call Control (BCC)· Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining)· Point-to-Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining)· Capacity of 96 BRI circuits and 192 BRI channels

PRI● ESF/B8ZS● DID (routes on the last 8 digits)● Yield to Glare Customer Side● Outbound Caller ID Number● Inbound Caller ID Name and Number (as provided by the telco)● NI1/NI2 (National Standard 1 and 2) Compliant● FAS (Facility Associated Signaling) - D-channel resides on PRI

PRI Networking With Two Local Voice Mails, Masters Must Have Different Numbering

When programming a PRI network with each system having their own local voice mail, the master numbers for the voice mails must be deÞned in different series in Program 11-01. The second digit of the extension number can not be the same. For example, 700 and 701 will not work, however 700 and 710 can be used.

Ring GroupsRing groups are NOT shared between networked systems. The only way you can ring a phone in Site A and Site B at the same time is to DIL a trunk to an extension or a virtual extension at Site B and program Call Forward Both Ring to an extension or virtual extension at Site A.

12 ◆ Networking


Programming

Also refer to the Numbering Plan (page 32) feature for additional required programming.

➻ 10-03-01 : PCB Setup - ISDN Line ModeDetermine the line mode of the ISDN. If Basic Rate Interface (BRI) is chosen, the setting must be done for each line. The settings must match in all networked systems. The following entries are acceptable for Networking.

A PRIU PCB will provide up to 24 channels - the BRIU PCB will provide 2 channels. Pro-gram 10-32-01 can limit the quantity of channels available for PRIU interfaces.

The installation of each mode is shown in the following diagrams.

Mode 3 BRI/PRI Network Mode (Lease Line)

Mode 4 BRI/PRI Network Mode (Interconnected Line)

ISDN Line Number 01-08

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ISDN Line Mode 3 = Network Mode (Leased Line)4 = Network Mode (Interconnected Line)5 = Interconnection (Interconnected Line, Fixed Layer 1 Forced NT Mode)

1

AspireMode 3

Master Side

AspireMode 3

Slave Side

NT1 NT1BRI Leased Line

T<-S S->T

Slave SlaveClock SignalGenerator

AspireMode 4

Master Side

AspireMode 4

Slave SideS->T

SlaveClock SignalGenerator

Networking ◆ 13


Mode 5 BRI/PRI Interconnection Mode (Interconnected Line, Layer 1=NT)

➻ 10-03-03: PCB Setup - Connection TypeThe connection type should be changed if Basic Rate Interface (BRI) is used. Only Point-to-Point connection (1) is available for system interconnection.

Example:

➻ 10-03-10 : PCB Setup - Master/Slave SystemDetermine which system will be the master system and which one(s) will be the slave sys-tem(s). If one system is set as the Master, all the other systems must be set as the Slave. The choice of Master/Slave is determined by the ISDN clock available at the Aspire. With a direct connection: Master = S-Point, Slave = T-Point. With a telco connection: Master = T-Point, Slave = T-Point. See the Appendix (page 237) for further detail.

Example:



03 Connection Type 0 = Point-to-Multipoint (not available for Networking)1 = Point-to-Point

0

System � A System � B

1: Point-to-Point 1: Point-to-Point



10 Master/Slave System (Network Mode Only)

0- Slave System1- Master System

0


1: Master 2: Slave

AspireMode 5

Slave Side

AspireMode 5

Master Side

GW GWEthernet

S<-T T->S

Slave SlaveClock SignalGenerator

Clock SignalGenerator

14 ◆ Networking


➻ 10-03-11 : PCB Setup - Networking System NumberThe Networking ID is used to select the access route for dialed digits. You can choose any number 0 to 50 (0 equals no operation). This ID is used when setting the numbering plan for the networked systems. The same ID number must be set in both 10-03-11 and 11-01. Refer to Numbering Plan (page 32) for more on the numbering plan settings.

Example:

➻ 10-32-01 : PRI Networking Channel LimitationWith software 2.09 or higher, this program can be used to assign the number of B-channels to be used for each ISDN PCB. This allows for fractional PRIs when used with multiple site net-working. If this program is limited to less than "23" on one side of the network, then it also limits both inbound and outbound network calls. This also applies on the other side of the net-work as well.(Default: Slots 1-16 = 23, Entries: 1-23)

➻ 11-02-01 : Extension NumberingAssign the extension numbers to the ports. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The Þrst/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.



10 Networking System Number (Network Mode Only)

0-50 0


Networking ID: 1 Networking ID: 1

Networking ◆ 15

Setting Up The Networking FeatureIP Networking

IP Networking

Voice Over IP Networking

Refer to Appendix (page 237) for an example of setting up a network using ISDN or IP connections.

Using H.323 protocol for voice transmit protocol, it is possible to network Aspire systems. VoIP can be used to network the Aspire S, M, L, and XL systems.

● Using IP Networking the maximum quantity of simultaneous calls is limited by the availabil-ity of resources on the VOIPU PCB�s installed. A maximum of sixteen 16VOIPU PCB�s can be installed each with a 16 port expansion daughter card giving a maximum of 512 speech channels (this number depends on the system and the NTCPU type).

● The maximum quantity of calls may also be reduced by the compression mode (CODEC type) of the VOIPU PCB�s, this is selectable by the installer in Program 84-12-28. Refer to the Aspire Software Manual (P/N 0893200) for further details.

When using IP Networking, keep the following items in mind:

● In order to keep the audio quality, prevent sending and receiving unnecessary packets by:

● not using a repeater hub with the Aspire system.

● turning off the Spanning Tree feature, if possible.

● Disable the SIP NAPT router in Program 10-12-06 (set to 0) to prevent the IP address from being changed by any other equipment.

● Use equipment which provides an Auto-Negotiation feature, if possible.

● The UPnP feature is not guaranteed to work with the Aspire system.

● In order to use the Networking feature, the Aspire M/L/XL NTCPU must have a Feature Upgrade or Enhanced PAL chip installed. The Aspire S requires the ENTU LAN card in order to use VoIP PCBs.

● IP addresses are required for each site�s NTCPU, VoIP cards in each site, and the default gate-way (inside IP address) from each site�s routers.

Ring GroupsRing groups are NOT shared between networked systems. The only way you can ring a phone in Site B and Site A at the same time is to DIL a trunk to an extension or a virtual extension at Site B and program Call Forward Both Ring to an extension or virtual extension at Site A.

CAUTION

As with any Voice Over IP (VoIP) implementation, there are several issues that should be considered when setting up IP Networking on the Aspire.

These issues are discussed in detail in the Aspire Voice Over IP Manual. Please refer to this before installing IP Networking.

16 ◆ Networking


In-Band/Out-of-Band DTMF SignalingIn-band signaling is the way to send DTMF tone just as audio (in band of the RTP packet). There is no other message sent to the far end for the DTMF digits. Therefore, if this is used with G.729 pro-tocol, the DTMF tone will not be received properly. At the level G.729 compresses the audio, it affects the actual DTMF tone and it can not be interpreted by the far end. This is by the design of VoIP and there is no way to correct it.

Out-of-band signaling sends a special message to the far end for the DTMF digits (out of band of the RTP packet). The actual DTMF audio will be muted. There are two signaling types - RFC2833 and H.245. Both signaling types should work on every protocol (G.729, G.711, etc.).

Aspire software version 2.63 and higher supports out-of-band signaling, allowing DTMF digits to be sent when using G.729 protocol. However, in-band signaling on G.729 will never work on any phone system unless the deÞned compression rate is changed.

To enable the out-of-band signal function, you must have software 2.63 or higher, change Program 84-12-31 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Setup - DTMF Relay Mode to RFC2833 (an entry of "1"), and change 84-06-10 : VOIPU Setup - DTMF Behavior for the card slot of the VoIP card to out of band (an entry of "2"). If these options are not set, DTMF tones will not be sent across the network. This will affect voice mail as well as any other device requiring DTMF.

Call Transfer to i-Series System Via VoIP ConnectionWhen an Aspire system is connected via a VoIP connection to an i-Series system in a tie-line type setup, in order to transfer calls from the Aspire system to the i-Series, in addition to the VoIP pro-gramming, set up the Flexible Routing Tables as follows:

● Program 44-05-01 : ARS/F-Route Table ; Table Number 1 = 9 (Trunk Group for Aspire VoIP Trunk)

● Program 10-23-02 : H.323 System Interconnection, IP Address ; System Number 3 = 172.16.9.10 (IP Address for i-Series System)

● Program 10-23-04 : H.323 System Interconnection, Alias Address ; System Number 3 = 4 (For Dial 4 Calls)

With this programming, the Aspire system will wait for the Trunk Interdigit Timer to expire before dialing out after an i-Series extension (4xxx) is dialed.

If the F-Routing is set up with Program 44-05-01; Table Number 1 set to 103 (Networking) and Program 10-27-01; System ID 3 = 172.16.9.10 (IP Address for i-Series), though the i-Series system will be able to transfer calls to the Aspire, the Aspire system will not be able to transfer to the i -Series.

Explanation of Routing for IP NetworkingWhen a user places a call to a remote extension number the dialled digits are checked against the Numbering Scheme in Program 11-01. This will provide the Node ID number of the route to the remote system.

The Aspire will then Þnd the destination IP Address by searching Program 10-27 for the destination IP Address for the given Node ID number.

Networking ◆ 17


Quantity of Voice Paths AvailableThe quantity of voice calls that can be made at any one time are dependent on various factors.

● VOIPU Resource - A free VOIPU resource must be available at each Aspire system.

● Program 10-19 : The mode of each VOIPU resource can be conÞgured, modes 0 (ICM/Trunk) or 3 (NTW) can be used by Aspire Networking calls.

● IP Network Bandwidth Restrictions - These limitations are beyond the scope of the Aspire. If there is not enough bandwidth available the call can not be maintained.

VOIPU PCB IP Address OptionsA static IP address can be assigned to the VOIPU PCB. The IP address can also be assigned by DHCP by setting Program 84-04-01.

18 ◆ Networking


Programming

Also refer to the Numbering Plan (page 32) feature for additional required programming.

➻ 10-12-01 : NTCPU Network Setup - IP AddressSelect the IP address of the NTCPU (default: 172.16.0.10). A static IP address is required by the NTCPU. Each Aspire system in the network must have a unique IP address. The system must be reset in order for the change to take effect.

➻ 10-12-02 : NTCPU Network Setup - Subnet MaskSelect the Subnet Mask to be used by the IP server (default: 255.255.0.0).

Example:

➻ 10-20-01 : LAN Setup for External Equipment - TCP PortDeÞne the TCP port number for communicating to external equipment. The port number deÞned should be the same in each networked system.

Item No. Item Input Data Default Conditions

01 NTCPUIP Address

1.0.0.1 - 126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1 -191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 - 223.255.254.254

172.16.0.10

02 NTCPUSubnet Mask

128.0.0.0240.0.0.0254.0.0.0255.192.0.0255.252.0.0255.255.128.0255.255.248.0255.255.255.0255.255.255.224255.255.255.252

192.0.0.0248.0.0.0255.0.0.0255.224.0.0255.254.0.0255.255.192.0255.255.252.0255.255.255.128255.255.255.240255.255.255.254

224.0.0.0252.0.0.0255.128.0.0255.248.0.0255.255.0.0255.255.224.0255.255.254.0255.255.255.192255.255.255.248255.255.255.255

255.255.0.0 The setting of Subnet-Mask is mistaken when all Host Address are 0.

If the network section is:0,127128.0191.255192.0.0223.255.255The setting of Subnet-Mask is mistaken.


IP Address: 172.16.0.10 IP Address: 172.16.0.11

Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0

Type of external equipment 1- CTI Server2- ACD MIS3- - Reserve -4- Network Listener5- SMDR6- DIM Access

Networking ◆ 19


Example:

➻ 10-23-xx : H.323 System InterconnectiondeÞne the IP address of another system, call control port number and alias address for Aspire sys-tem inter-connection. This program is activated when Program 10-17-01 and 10-18 are registered. Depending on your system software, the system allows for up to 50 or 1000 systems to be regis-tered.


01 TCP Port / Network Listener

0-65535 External Device 1 = 0External Device 2 = 0External Device 3 = 0

External Device 4 = 30000External Device 5 = 0External Device 6 = 0


External Equipment: 4 External Equipment: 4

Port: 30000 Port: 30000

System Number 0001-1000

Item No. Item Input Data Default Related

Program

01 System Interconnection 0 = No1 = Yes

0

02 IP address 1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254

0.0.0.0 Activated when

10-23-01=1

03 Call Control Port 1-65535 1720 Activated when

10-23-01=1

04 Alias AddressIf Program 10-28-04 is used, its entry must be numeric as 10-23-04 does not permit text entry - only numeric entries.

Max 12 addresses No Setting Activated when

10-23-01=1

10-28-04

20 ◆ Networking


➻ 10-27 : IP System ID - IP AddressSet the System ID, IP address, and Call Procedure Port of the networked IP systems.

If setting up a multi-site network, you may wish to deÞne each system the same in this pro-gram. This will help reduce the confusion if the same ID is programmed in each system. (You do not need to program the IP address for the system being programmed.) Using the following sample programming, Network 1 is ID 1, Network 2 is ID 2, Network 3 is ID 3.

Program 10-27-01 Entries

Network 1 Network 2 Network 3

System ID 1System ID 2System ID 3

172.16.0.10172.16.0.11172.16.0.12

172.16.0.10172.16.0.11172.16.0.12

172.16.0.10172.16.0.11172.16.0.12

System ID 01-50


Program

01 IP AddressSystem ID is related with the System ID in the Numbering Plan (Program 11-01-01). When the digits are analyzed and the sys-tem ID is determined from the system data set in the Numbering Plan, the Networking call will be sent to the IP Address set in this program.

The IP Address should be the IP Address of the peer NTCPU (Pro-gram 10-12-01).

1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254

0.0.0.0 11-01-0110-12-01

02 Call Procedure PortThe Port Number should be set with the same value as the H.225 setup port in Program 84-02-33.

1-65535 1730 84-02-33

Networking ◆ 21


Example:

➻ 11-02-01 : Extension NumberingAssign the extension numbers to the ports. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The Þrst/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.

➻ 84-01-xx : CODEC Information Basic SetupDeÞne the data of H.323 trunks. These settings apply to H.323 Trunks only. Refer to Program 84-12-xx for H.323 extensions and IP networking.

Note that the value of Item 33 (Audio Capability Priority) determines which CODEC settings to use. This means, for example, that if G.711 is selected in Item 33, the settings in Items 5-12 and 19-21 will be ignored.


System ID: 1 System ID: 1

IP Address: 172.16.0.11(from Program 10-12-01)

IP Address: 172.16.0.10(from Program 10-12-01)

Port: 1730 Port: 1730

Item No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 -- Not Used --

02 Number of G711 Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms3 = 30 ms

3 Maximum number of G711 Audio Frame

03 G711 Silence Detection Mode 0:Disable1:Enable

0 DeÞne whether the silence detection enables on G711 or not

04 G711 type 0:A-law1: u-law

1 Set the type of G711(A-law or u-law)

05 G729 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms2 = 20 ms3 = 30 ms4 = 40 ms5 = 50 ms6 = 60 ms7 = 70 ms8 = 80 ms


06 G729 0:Disable1:Enable

0

07 G.729 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0-500 ms 30

08 G.729 Jitter Buffer Type 0-500 ms 60

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0-500 ms 120

10 -- Not Used --

22 ◆ Networking


11 Number of G723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec2 = 60 msec



0

13 Maximum value of Jitter Delay 0-65535 msec 60 msec Maximum value of Jitter Delay for audio delay

14 -- Not Used --

15 Jitter Buffer Mode 1 = static2 = adaptive during

silence3 = adaptive immedi-

ately

1 Set the mode of Jitter Buffer

16 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~145 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~145 ms 60 Set the average value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~145 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

19 G.723,G.729 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~500 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.723, G.729Jitter Buffer

20 G.723, G.729 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~500 ms 60 Set the average value of G.723, G.729 Jitter Buffer

21 G.723,G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~500 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.723, G.729Jitter Buffer

22 VAD threshold 0-30(-20db~+10db)

0:-20db (-50dbm)1:-19db (-49dbm)

:20 = 0db

(-30dbm) :

29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)30:10dbm

(-20dbm)

20 Threshold of silence detectionChange value based �30Become invalid item if item 03 is set to Disable


Networking ◆ 23


23 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000(-5000 ~ -7000dbm)

5000 = -5000dbm :

7000 = -7000dbm

7000 Noise level of silence

24 Echo canceler mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1 Determine whether or not to use Echo canceller.

25 Echo canceler tail size 1 = 8 ms2 = 16 ms3 = 32mS

2 Become invalid item if item 24 is set to Disable

26 Echo canceler nlp mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0 Non-linear processing mode

27 Echo canceler nlp noise 40-70 (-40~-70)

40 = -40 dbm :

70 = -70 dbm


28 Echo canceler cng cfg 0 = adaptive1 = Þxed


29 Echo canceler 4w det 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

30 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

31 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

32 -- Not Used --

33 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711 PT1:G723 PT2:G729 PT

0 The option selected here determines what other options are applied from this program.


24 ◆ Networking


34 Bandwidth Control 0:Disable1:Enable

0 Controls the voice bandwidth on an H.323 trunk.

35 Maximum Bandwidth 0-65535kbps 0 The maximum total bandwidth limita-tion for voice packets.

36 Fax Max Rate 24 = V.27ter, 2400 bps48 = V.27ter, 4800 bps

72 = V.29, 7200 bps96 = V.29, 9600 bps

120 = V17, 12000 bps144 = V.17, 14400 bps

5

37 Fax Playout FIFO Nominal Delay

0-600 ms 300 ms Increase the value for networks which experience large packet losses.

38 Fax Packet Size 20-48 bytes 20

39 Fax Modem Transmit Level 0-130dBm -13dBm

6(-6dBm)

40 Fax Modem CD Threshold 0 = -26dBm1 = -33dBm2 = -43dBm

1

41 Fax No Activity Timeout Duration

10-32000 sec 30

42 Override Encapsulation Method 0 = Open Channel DeÞned Packet Encap-

sulation1 = T.38 UDP

2 = T.38/TRP UDP

1 T.38/TRP UDPVoice-FaxClose-Reopen

43 High Speed Data Packet Rate 10-80 ms 60

44 Low Speed Data Redundancy 0-8 0

45 High Speed Data Redundancy 0-2 0

46 TCF Handling Method 1 = TCF is Locally Gen-erated and Checked

2 = TCF is Sent Over the Network

1 For H.323 negotiation

47 Maximum Low Speed Data Packetization

1

48 Transmit Network Timeout 10-32000 sec 150 sec

49 Eßag Start Timer 0-65535 2600 ms

50 Eßag Stop Timer 0-65535 2300 ms

51 Fax Relay: Scan Line Fix Up Feature

0 = Disable1 = Enable

1


Networking ◆ 25


ConditionsYou must log out of system programming in order for changes to the following items will take affect:

Item 39 Item 53Item 40 Item 54Item 41 Item 55Item 49 Item 56Item 50 Item 57Item 51 Item 58Item 52

52 Fax Relay: Eßags for First DIS 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

53 Fax Relay: FOP Protocol Enhancement


1

54 Fax Relay: NSF Override 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

55 T30: ECM 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

56 T30: MR Page Compression 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

57 NSF Country Code 0-65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

58 NSF Vendor Code 65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

59 Fax Relay Function 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0 Determine whether or not the Fax Relay function should be used.

60 Echo Canceller ConÞg Type 0 = Auto1 = Type 12 = Type 23 = Type 3

1

61 Echo Auto Gain Control 0 - 5 0

62 H.323 DTMF Payload Number 0 = VOIPU1 = RFC2833

2 = H.2453 = Disable

0 DeÞne the H.323 DTMF Payload Number.


26 ◆ Networking


➻ 84-02-35 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup - Fast Start ModeIf VoIP is used for networking, the Fast Start option must be enabled.

➻ 84-05-01 : VOIPU IP Address Setup - IP AddressFor each VOIPU PCB, enter the IP address for the VOIPU PCB (default: slot 1=172.16.0.20, slot 2 = 172.16.0.21, etc). The IP address should be increased according to the number of VOIPU PCBs. This entry becomes invalid if Program 84-04 is set to "1" (DHCP enabled).

Example:

➻ 84-06-10 : VOIPU Setup - DTMF BehaviorSet the DTMF option to �2� when using the networking feature. The system programming must be exited before these program options to take affect.

Input Data


35 Fast Start 0: Disable1: Enable

1

Slot Number 01-16

Item Input Data Default Description Related Program

IP Address

1.0.0.1�126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1�191.254255.254192.0.1.1�223.255.254.254

Slot 1: 172.16.0.20Slot 2: 172.16.0.21Slot 3: 172.16.0.22Slot 4: 172.16.0.23Slot 5: 172.16.0.24Slot 6: 172.16.0.25Slot 7: 172.16.0.26Slot 8: 172.16.0.27

Set IP Address of VoIPU PCB.IP Address will be increased in accor-dance with number of slot.

84-04 This becomes invalid data if Program 84-04 is set to 1:Enable.


IP Address: 172.16.0.20 IP Address: 172.16.0.21

Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0

SLOT Number 01-16

10 DTMF Behavior 0 = DTMF Relay disabled1 = In-Band DTMF relay,

do NOT report to Host processor

2 = Out of Band DTMF relay, do not pass tones as

voice

0 � Inbound - DTMF is transferred by RTP packets.

� Outbound - DTMF is transferred by H.245 protocol.

This setting allows DTMF digits to be relayed between the VOIPU PCBs. It is recommended that this is set to �1�.

Networking ◆ 27


➻ 84-12-xx : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic SetupSetup the CODEC information of H.323 phones and IP Networking. Refer to Program 84-12-xx for H.323 extensions and IP networking.

Input Data


Program

01 G711 Audio FramePrior to software 2.63, the only entry possible was �2� or �3�. With software 2.63+, additional entries are available.

Note: Currently, only the Aspire S system can use the 10ms setting. Aspire will provide this option in the future.

1 - 3(1 = 10ms, 2 = 20 ms, 3 = 30ms)

3

02 G711 VAD Mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

03 G711 Type 0 = A-law1 = μ-law

1

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~145 ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Type 0~145 ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~145 ms 120

07 G.729 Audio FramePrior to software 2.63, only entries 3-8 were available. With software 2.63+, additional entries are available.

Note: Currently, only the Aspire S system can use the 10ms setting. Aspire will provide this option in the future

1-8 (1 = 10ms,

2 = 20ms, etc.)

3

08 G.729 VAD Mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0




12 G.723 Audio Frame 1-2 1


0




28 ◆ Networking



silence3 = adaptive immed

1

18 VAD Threshold 0-30 (19db~+10db,Adaptec threshold)

0 = Adaptec threshold1 = -19db(-49dbm)

:20 = 0db (-30dbm)

:29 = 9dbm(-21dbm)30 = 10dbm(-20dbm)

20

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 (-5000_-7000dbm)

5000:-5000dbm :

7000:-7000dbm

7000

20 Echo Canceler Mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

21 Echo Canceler Tail Size84-12-20 - Disable

1 = 8 ms2 = 16 ms3 = 32mS

2

22 Echo Canceler NLP ModeNon-linear processing mode


0

23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise84-12-22 - Disable

40-70 (-40~-70)

40 = -40 dbm :

70 = -70 dbm

70

24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG84-12-22 - Disable

0 = adaptive1 = Þxed

0

25 Echo Canceler 4w Det 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

26 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14


Program

Networking ◆ 29


27 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

28 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711_PT1:G723_PT2:G729_PT

0


0


31 DTMF Relay ModeIn-band signaling is the way to send DTMF tone just as audio (in band of the RTP packet). There is no other message sent to the far end for the DTMF digits. Therefore, if this is used with G.729 protocol, the DTMF tone will not be received properly. At the level G.729 compresses the audio, it affects the actual DTMF tone and it can not be interpreted by the far end. This is by the design of VoIP and there is no way to correct it. If G.729 is used, then out-of-band signal-ing is required when DTMF digits need to be sent over the network.

Out-of-band signaling sends a special message to the far end for the DTMF digits (out of band of the RTP packet). The actual DTMF audio will be muted. There are two signaling types - RFC2833 and H.245/VOIPU. Both signaling types should work on every protocol (G.729, G.711, etc.). RFC2833 must be selected in order for DTMF digits to be sent over the network.

0 = Disable1 = RFC28332 = VOIPU

2 84-06-10 : VOIPU Setup

- DTMF Behavior for

the card slot of the VoIP card to out of band (an entry of

"2")

32 FAX RelaySelect "2" for FAX Relay to SLT (Program 15-03-03:special), Trunk and networking.

Refer to Program 84-01-36 through 84-01-57 for FAX Relay options.


2 = Each Port Mode

0


Program

30 ◆ Networking

Setting Up The Networking FeatureMulti-Site Networking

Multi-Site Networking

Multi-Site NetworkingMulti-Site Networking is a network of three or more Aspire systems connected by either ISDN or IP.

The conÞguration for three or more sites is the same as for two sites, refer to ISDN Networking (page 12) or IP Networking (page 16) for details of setting up the Aspire systems. Please refer to the following list before installing Multi-Site Networking.

● All systems must have NTCPU software version V2.5x or later.

● It is recommended that all systems in the network have compatible levels of software installed. Refer to Networking Software Levels (page 4).

● A Feature Upgrade PAL chip (P/N 0891039) is required for the Basic NTCPU or an Enhanced NTCPU (P/N 0891038) can be used to enable Networking.

● A network can combine both ISDN and IP Networking within the same network as long as there is direct connection between each system. Refer to Networking Using Mixed PCBs (PRI, BRI or VoIP) (page 4) for additional information.

● All systems within the network must have a direct connection to all other systems in the net-work. This makes IP Networking the more practical type for Multi-Site Networks - only one VOIPU PCB is required in a system cabinet regardless of the number of networked systems, where PRI or BRI would require one PCB be installed in a system cabinet for each networked system.

● VOIPU resources will be used at each system when a call is transferred. For example, a call that originates from System A and calls System B, is held and transferred to System C, will use VOIPU resources at all three systems.

The same also applies for ISDN Networking - an ISDN channel will be used from System A to B and also from System B to C.

Networking ◆ 31

Setting Up The Networking FeatureNumbering Plan

Numbering Plan

Numbering Plan➻ 11-01-01 : System Numbering

Set the system�s internal (Intercom) numbering plan and system ID to route to networked sys-tems. The numbering plan assigns the Þrst and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes, within a networking node or to reach another node.

Consider using a "UniÞed Numbering Plan" for extensions. This gives every extension in the network a unique extension number. The extension number can then be used to route a call to the proper node. This also allows the same extension number to be dialed at any node to reach a given extension.

PRI Networking With Two Local Voice Mails, Masters Must Have Different Numbering

When programming a PRI network with each system having their own local voice mail, the master numbers for the voice mails must be deÞned in different series in Program 11-01. The second digit of the extension number can not be the same. For example, 700 and 701 will not work, however 700 and 710 can be used.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the System Numbering (page 133) table, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes.

● Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For exam-ple, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected would be 600-699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected would be 6000-6999.)

CAUTION Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for System Numbering (page 133) to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.

Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Program or Program 90-03 to make a backup copy of your system�s data.

1. Enter the digits you want to change.

2. Specify the length of the code you select to change.

3. Assign a function to the code selected.

32 ◆ Networking


● Entering two digits lets you deÞne codes based on the Þrst two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to deÞne the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only * and # use two-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undeÞned.

Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits com-prise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the System Numbering (page 133) table. In the default program, all codes from 100-999 are three digits long. Codes beginning with 0 are one digit long. Codes beginning with * are 3 digits long and codes begin-ning with # are 4 digits long.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column in the System Numbering (page 133) table. The choices are:

● Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your sys-tem operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should: - Change the Dial Type for the digit 1 from 1 (Service Code) to 2 (extension number). - Change the Dial Type for the digit 7 from 3 (not used) to 1 (Service Code). - In Program 11-02, reassign extension numbers on each ßoor from 100 to 399. - In Programs 11-10 - 11-14, reassign the Service Codes from the 100 series (e.g., 116)

to the 700 series (e.g., 716). (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 through

11-16.)

Dial Types Dial Type Description Related Program

0 - Not Used -

1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Registration)11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)11-14 : Service Code Setup (for HOTEL)11-15 : Service Code Setup (Special access)

2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbers11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbers11-06 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Extension Numbers11-07 : Department Calling Group Numbers11-08 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Group Pilot Numbers

3 Trunk Access Code 11-09 : Trunk Access Code.

4 Special Trunk Access 11-09 : Trunk Access Code.

5 Operator Access 20-17 : Operator�s Extension

6 ARS/F-Route Access 44-xx

8 Networking 10-03 : PCB Setup10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment10-27 : IP System IP

Networking ◆ 33


Example:This example shows two separate extension numbers assigned for the networked systems. System A dials 4xx to reach System B, while system B dials 3xx to reach System A.

The following example shows a uniÞed extension number assignment. All users dial a 4-digit extension number (2xxx) to reach anyone within the network, regardless of which system they are connected. System A users have extension numbers 20xx, while system B users have extension numbers 23xx.

It is also possible to use F-Route to select the correct node for the destination extension num-ber. The example below shows a numbering scheme where the user must dial an additional digit 7 before the extension number. This is routed by F-Route to the correct node and ana-lyzed again in the F-Route tables at the remote Aspire.

When using F-Route, you must translate the dialed number (e.g. 72301 translates to 2301) otherwise the call will not �exit� from the F-Route tables.


Dial �3x�: � Digit �3�� Type 2 (Intercom)

Dial �3x�: � Digit �3�� Type 8 (Networking)� System ID �1�

Dial �4x�: � Digit �3�� Type 8 (Networking)� System ID �1�

Dial �4x�: � Digit �3�� Type 2 (Intercom)

Programming System � A System � B

Program 11-01 Dial �2�: � 2x = Digit �0�� 20 = Digit �4�, Type 2 (Intercom)� 23 = Digit �4�, Type 8 (Network),

System ID �1�

Dial �2�: � 2x = Digit �0�� 20 = Digit �4�, Type 8 (Network),

System ID �1�� 23 = Digit �4�, Type 2 (Intercom)

Program 11-02 Port 1 = extension number 2001Port 2 = extension number 2002Port 3 = extension number 2003, etc.

Port 1 = extension number 2301Port 2 = extension number 2302Port 3 = extension number 2303, etc.

34 ◆ Networking


Programming System � A System � B

Program 11-01 Dial �7�: � 7x = Digit �5�, Type 6 (F-Route)

Dial �7�: � 7x = Digit �5�, Type 6 (F-Route)

Program 11-02 Port 1 = extension number 2001Port 2 = extension number 2002Port 3 = extension number 2003, etc.

Port 1 = extension number 2301Port 2 = extension number 2302Port 3 = extension number 2303, etc.

Program 44-01-01 0 (Not Used) 0 (Not Used)

Program 44-02 Table 1 Table 2 Table 1 Table 2

Program 44-02-01 720@@ 723@@ 720@@ 723@@

Program 44-02-02 2 2 2 2

Program 44-02-03 1 2 1 2

Program 44-05 Table 1 Table 2 Table 1 Table 2

Program 44-05-01 255 101 101 255

Program 44-05-02 1 0 0 1

Networking ◆ 35


- For Your Notes -

36 ◆ Networking

Features

Features

Section 2

Features

Refer to the Aspire Software Manual (P/N 0893200) for complete description and programming information for the following features. The information detailed

here applies only to the feature when used in a Networked system.

Networking ◆ 37

Features

- For Your Notes -

38 ◆ Networking

Features911 Call Routing

911 Call Routing

911 Call Routing : Using ARS Class of Service Matching to Call Local Authorities

When using IP telephones at a remote site (System B) which are registered to the main system (System A), you can use the ARS Class of Service Matching feature added in software 2.63 to route 911 calls to the local authorities at the remote location. Without this programming, since the phones are registered to the main site, when 911 calls are placed by IP phones, the local authorities at the main site (System A) would be called.

This option requires Aspire software 2.63 and higher and the following programs are set in the main system (System A).

Related Programs

Each remote site needs to have a different ARS Class of Service. If, for example, there were 50 IP sets on one remote site, each would use the same ARS Class of Service.

It is important to remember that there must be a trunk available to make a call across the network from the main system. Then, by default, the system will access the Þrst available trunk in trunk group 1 at the remote side to place the 911 call.

Program Number Title

10-27-01 IP System ID� For each network node, assign an ID and corresponding IP address

of the networked IP system.

26-01-01 Automatic Route Selection Service - ARS Service� Enter �1� to enable ARS.

26-01-06 Automatic Route Selection Service - COS Match Access� Enter �1� to enable COS Matching.

26-04-01 ARS Class of Service� Assign the IP extension�s ARS Class of Service (0-16).

26-02-01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS /LCR - Dial� DeÞne the Dial Analysis Table. Enter �911� in a table.

26-02-02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS /LCR - Service Type� For the 911 Dial Analysis Table, enter the �1� to route the call to a

trunk group.Note: With PCPro/WebPro, the option is displayed as �Incoming Ring Group�.

26-02-03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS /LCR - Additional Data� Enter the network ID number which corresponds to the entry in

Program 10-27 preceded by �1�. (For example: ID 01 is entered as �101�, 02 is entered as �102�, etc.)

26-02-04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS /LCR - ARS Class of Service� Assign the ARS COS to the 911 Dial Analysis Table.

Networking ◆ 39

FeaturesARS/F-Route

ARS/F-Route

ARS/F-RouteDigits dialed by a user can be routed based on ARS programming or F-Route tables. In general, ARS provides the simpler solution, as long as outgoing trunk order/trunk priority is not required. (For instance, POTS lines used Þrst, if these are busy, then networked trunks are used.)

ARSWhen using ARS, keep the following items in mind:● ARS must for activated on all networked sites. ● You need to make sure the 911 calls route at the site from which they are dialed. ● If you wish to have outgoing calls use one group of trunks Þrst and, when those trunks

become busy, go out over the network trunks, F-Routing must be used. The order must be the your own site�s trunks and then the other site�s trunks. It will not work in the reverse.

Example: ● Site A: Use group 1 for all calls. ● Site B: Use "Group 1" trunks for local calls and network trunks. Use "Group 101" for long

distance calls in the 1 + 203 area.

The following represents a standard ARS conÞguration that should be done anytime you setup ARS.

Program Site A (far end)Site B (near end)

(All 1203-xxx-xxxx calls to go out site A's trunks)

Program 26-01-01ARS Service

1 (ARS enabled) 1 (ARS enabled)

Program 26-02-01Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access

002=1203@@@@@@@

Program 26-02-03Group Number for Dial Analysis Table

101 (10"1"= 10-27-01 network site 1)

Program 26-02-01Dial Analysis Table for ARS Access

Entries:� 001=911 � 391=1@@@@@@@@@@ � 392=2@@@@@@ � 393=3@@@@@@ � 394=4@@@@@@ � 395=5@@@@@@ � 396=6@@@@@@ � 397=7@@@@@@ � 398=8@@@@@@ � 399=9@@@@@@ � 400=0

Entries:� 001=911 � 391=1@@@@@@@@@@ � 392=2@@@@@@ � 393=3@@@@@@ � 394=4@@@@@@ � 395=5@@@@@@ � 396=6@@@@@@ � 397=7@@@@@@ � 398=8@@@@@@ � 399=9@@@@@@ � 400=0

Program 26-02-02Service Type for Dial Analysis Table

Type 1 = Incoming Ring Group (for all above entries)

Type 1 = Incoming Ring Group (for all above entries)

Program 26-02-03Group Number for Dial Analysis Table

1 (deÞned in 14-05-01) (for all above entries)

1 (deÞned in 14-05-01) (for all above entries except table 002 when using this example setup)

40 ◆ Networking

FeaturesARS/F-Route

F-RouteDigits dialed by a user can be sent to the F-Route tables and speciÞed as a networked number by entering the Networked node ID (Trunk Group 101-150 correspond to Network ID�s 1-50) as the target trunk group number, calls will be routed to the target system via the node ID speciÞed. The F-Route tables will then analyze the dialed digits in the target system. At the target system the call will be analyzed within F-Route for the following call types:● Outgoing call to a trunk

● Extension access call (you must translate the dialed digits)● Access to the other system via Aspire Networking● No deÞned dial

Alternate route selection is not available when the primary networking route is busy. When all channels are busy, the call will return a busy tone.

If you wish to allow an extension on System A to dial an access code to access a speciÞc trunk on the remote System B. You could:

● Set up a F-route in Site B. For example, using the digit 7, go to Program 11-01 and for digit 7, enter under 7x, Digit = 1, Type = F-Route.

● In Program 44-02-01, under F-Route 1, enter dial data as 7 and additional data as 1.

● In Program 44-05-01, under route table 1, detour order 1, enter the trunk group (101, would be Program 10-27 system 01).

● At Site A also do the same setup, except in Program 44-05-01 put the trunk group you want to access and also delete 1 digit.

When someone from Site B dials "7" they will hear dial tone from Site A.

Compared With Single System ConÞguration

In a single system with F-Route used, the dialing is analyzed when the call is initially dialed.

Operation

With the sample programming shown below, dialing the F-Route access number, which is deÞned in the F-Route table (7300), the system calls extension number 300 within System 1 (System ID 1). The telephone�s display initially indicates the F-Route number in progress, then changes to appear as an normal intercom call.

(Sample Programming for calls from System 1 to System 2. To simplify the example, the program-ming for calls from System 2 to System 1 has been omitted.)

Networking ◆ 41

FeaturesARS/F-Route

Note: In this example, Dial 7 is set to 4-digit number length. This is important for Net-working as it is possible to set call forward to an F-Route number. The full digit length must be set in Program 11-01 to allow the user to enter the full F-Route destination number.

For example if 11-01 was set to 1-digit number length, in the example above, a user who sets call forward can only enter 1 digit as the destination (e.g. 848+1+7). This would cause all calls to the extension to fail while the call forward is set to an invalid destination number.

Note: When a call is routed via Networking by using F-Route, the dialed digits MUST be translated otherwise the call will not �exit� from the F-Route tables.

Note: When a Networking call is routed via F-Route, it is possible to translate the dialed digits at either (or both) the originating or destination system. Programs 44-05-02 (Delete digits) and 44-05-03 (Additional Dial Table) are available for digit translation.

Program System 1 System 2

Program 11-01-01System Numbering

Dial �7�Digit �4� (4 digit)Type �6� (F-Route)

Dial �7�Digit �4� (4 digit)Type �6� (F-Route)

Program 44-02-Dial analysis table for F-Route access

01 �7300��73@@� (using wildcard) is available.

�7300��73@@� (using wildcard) is available.

02 �2� (F-Routing) �2� (F-Routing)

03 Add Code = �1� Add Code = �1�

Program 44-05-System Numbering

01 F-Route table-1Trunk Group No. �101�(Route to System ID 1)

F-Route table-1Trunk Group �255�(Route to Intercom)

02 Delete Digit: 0 Delete Digit: 1

42 ◆ Networking

FeaturesARS/F-Route

Related ProgramsRefer to the Aspire Software Manual (P/N 0893200) for full programming details.

➻ 26-01-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service - ARS ServiceEnable (1) or disable (0) ARS.

➻ 26-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR - DialEnter the digits (16 digits maximum: 1-9, 0 * #, @; 400 separate entries) for the Dial Analysis Table which will be analyzed by ARS/LCR. This table will be checked after any programmed F-Route operations have completed. The system will then refer to Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 to determine the routing for the call. To enter a wild card/don�t care digit, press Line Key 1 to enter an @ symbol. It is important to remember that the system checks the table numbers in numerical order. This means that entries for speciÞc numbers should be entered Þrst (such as your local area codes), then enter the items containing wild card digits. If the system sees an entry of �2@@� then any table entries which follow will be ignored.

For example, if 268, 269, and 270 are local exchanges, these would be the Þrst three table entries which would route according to the settings made in Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for each of the table entries. If the next entry is �2@@�, then the system checks no further in this program and routes all other �2xx� numbers according to the entries made in Program 26-02-02 and 26-02-03 for this table entry.


ARS

26-01-01 ARS Service

26-02-02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS

26-02-03 Dial Analysis Table-Additional Data/Service Number for ARS

26-03-01 ARS Dial Treatments

F-Route

11-01 Numbering Plan

44-01 System Options for F-Route Service

44-02 Dial Analysis Table for F-Route Access

44-04 F-Route Selection for time schedule

44-05 F-Route Table

44-06 Additional Dial Table

44-07 Gain Table for F-Route Access

44-08 Time Schedule for F-Route Service

44-09 Weekly Schedule for F-Route Service

44-10 Holiday Schedule for F-Route Service

Networking ◆ 43

FeaturesARS/F-Route

➻ 26-02-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Service TypeFor each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), select �0� for no ARS, �1� for Service Type 1 - Route to Trunk Group Number to have the number route to a trunk group [Refer to Program 26-02-03] or �2� for Service Type 2 - F-Route Selected to have the dialed number controlled by the F-Route table. If Service Type 2 is selected and F-Route operation is on, the F-Route table used is determined by Program 44-04. If F-Route operation is off, the routing is determined by Pro-gram 44-05.

➻ 26-02-03 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS - Additional Data / Service NumberFor each Dial Analysis Table (1-200), if Service Type 1 was selected in Program 26-02-02, enter the trunk group number (0-100, 0=no route).

➻ 26-03-01 : ARS Dial TreatmentsAssign the Dial Treatments (1-15) for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treat-ments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:

● 3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● 2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● 1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call. This requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● INPA - Insert the NPA speciÞed by NPA.● DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example,

D041234 out-dials 124. Valid entries are 0-9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234. This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone pro-gramming.

● Wnn - Wait nn seconds.● P - Pause in analog trunk.● R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modiÞcations● E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.● X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the system to

output the extension number of the call�s originator to the black box for the E911 feature.● An - Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert

a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identi-Þes which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element.

➻ 44-01-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route - ARS/F-Route Time ScheduleSet this option to �0� so that the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call.

➻ 44-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - DialSet the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing. Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: Analysis Table 1: 720@@; Analysis Table 2: 723@@.

➻ 44-02-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Service TypeSelect the Service Type (0=no setting, 1=extension call, 2=ARS/F-Route table, 3=Dial extension analyze table). Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: Analysis Table 1: 2 (ARS/F-Route table); Analysis Table 2: 2 (ARS/F-Route table).

➻ 44-02-03 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Additional DataEnter the additional data required for the service type selected in Program 44-02-02, either the number of digits to be deleted or the table number to be used. Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: 1 (delete 1 digit).

➻ 44-02-04 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Dial Tone SimulationIf enabled (1), this option sends dial tone to the calling party once the routing is determined. This may be required if the central ofÞce at the destination does not send dial tone. Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: 0 (disabled).

44 ◆ Networking

FeaturesARS/F-Route

➻ 44-05-01 : ARS/F-Route Table - Trunk Group NumberSelect the trunk group number to be used for the outgoing ARS call (0-100, 101-150, 255 [0 = No setting, 101-150 = Networking, 255 = Extension Call]). Using the 4-digit extension num-ber example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: ARS/F-Route Table Number 1: Priority Number 1, Trunk Group = 255; ARS/F-Route Table Number 2: Priority Number 1, Trunk Group = 101.

➻ 44-05-02 : ARS/F-Route Table - Delete DigitsEnter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number (0-255 [255 = Delete all]). Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: ARS/F-Route Table Number 1: Priority Number 1, Delete Digits = 1; ARS/F-Route Table Number 2: Priority Number 1, Delete Digits = 0.

➻ 44-05-03 : ARS/F-Route Table - Additional Dial Number TableEnter the table number (deÞned in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed (0-1000). Using the 4-digit extension number example in Program 11-01-01, the entry would be: ARS/F-Route Table Number 1: Priority Number 1, Additional Dial Number Table = 0; ARS/F-Route Table Number 1: Priority Number 1, Additional Dial Number Table = 0.

Networking ◆ 45

FeaturesBLF Indication

BLF Indication

BLF IndicationRefer to the Hotline/Direct Station Selection (DSS) feature (page 72) for full details.

46 ◆ Networking

FeaturesBarge In

Barge In

Barge InBarge In is available in the Networking feature with the following options:

● Barge into a conversation between an extension�s own system and a networked system

● Barge into a conversation between callers in a networked system

● Barge into a call between two networked systems

Barge In can be used in either Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) or Speech Mode (determined in Program 20-13-10).

Barge In cannot barge into calls across the network in the following instances:

● Conference calls

● Off hook signaling a telephone in the other system

● Barge into an extension�s call without Þrst calling the busy extension in the other system

Conditions● To ensure proper operation, use system software 4.09 or higher.

Operation

To Barge In after calling a busy extension: The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In.Listen for busy/ring or busy tone.

1. Call busy extension.

2. Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).OR

Dial the Barge In service code, 810.Users may hear a Barge-In tone, depending on the setting in Program 23-13-17.

Related Programs


11-12-08 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge In

11-16-02 One Digit Service Code Setup - Barge In

20-13-15 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Initiate

20-13-16 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Receive

20-13-17 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Tone/Display

Networking ◆ 47

FeaturesCall Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Call ForwardingCall Forwarding Immediate / Busy / No Answer / Busy-No Answer / Both Ring options are avail-able with the Networking feature.

With a networked system, when Call Forwarding enabled, there is a slight difference in the tele-phone�s display. With a single system, the extension name is displayed on the extension which has Call Forwarding. With a networked system, the extension number is displayed.

Operation

To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset) + Dial *2.OR

Press Call Forwarding key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 16).

2. Dial Call Forwarding condition: 1 = Personal Answering Machine Emulation (then skip to step 4 - refer also to �Voice Mail�). 2 = Busy or not answered4 = Immediate6 = Not answered7 = Immediate with simultaneous ringing (not for Voice Mail)0 = Cancel

3. Dial destination extension, Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key.

4. Dial Call Forwarding type:2 = All calls 3 = Outside calls only 4 = Intercom calls only

When you enable Call Forwarding, your Call Forwarding key ßashes slowly. If you don�t have a Call Forwarding key, DND ßashes slowly.

Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key ßashes when Call Forwarding is activated.

OR

1. Press Call Forwarding key.PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 10 for Forward All Calls ImmediatelyPGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 11 for Forward when BusyPGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 12 for Forward when UnansweredPGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 13 for Forward Busy/No AnswerPGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 14 for Forward with Both RingingPGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 15 for Follow MePGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 16 for Forward to Station (forward type is selected at the

time the option is set by the user)PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 17 for Forward to Device

2. Dial 1 plus extension to enable; dial 0 to disable.Once you activate Call Forwarding, only your Call Forwarding destination can place

an Intercom call to you.

3. Dial destination extension, Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key.You�ll hear stutter dial tone when placing a new call. Your Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key ßashes when Call Forwarding is

activated.

48 ◆ Networking

FeaturesCall Forwarding

Related Programs


11-11-01 Service Code: Call Forward � Immediate

11-11-02 Service Code: Call Forward � Busy

11-11-03 Service Code: Call Forward � No Answer

11-11-04 Service Code: Call Forward � Busy/No Answer

11-11-05 Service Code: Call Forward � Both Ring

11-11-06 Service Code: Call Forwarding (Select Option)

20-11-01 Call Forward � Immediate Class of Service

20-11-02 Call Forward � Busy Class of Service

20-11-03 Call Forward � No Answer Class of Service

20-11-04 Call Forward � Both Ring Class of Service

Networking ◆ 49

FeaturesCall Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override

Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override

Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb OverrideThe extension user may be able to call an extension which has Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb set.

Operation

To override an extension�s Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:

1. Call the forwarded or DND extension.

2. Press Override key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 37).OR

Dial the Call Forward / DND Override service code, 807.

Related Programs


11-12-01 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) : Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override

11-16-06 Single Digit Service Code Setup : DND/Call Forward Override

15-07-01 Programming Function Keys

20-06-01 Class of Service for Extensions

20-13-04 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forwarding/DND Override

50 ◆ Networking

FeaturesCall Forward, Off-Premise

Call Forward, Off-Premise

Call Forward, Off-PremiseOff-Premise Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. This feature works the same in a networked system as it does a single system.

A call to an extension at a remote system will forward to the Abbreviated Dial bin using a trunk at the remote system.

Conditions● To ensure proper operation, use system software 2.65 or higher.

Operation

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4. OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17) OR

At SLT, lift handset Dial *4.

2. Dial 6 + trunk access code. Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 804 + Line Group (1-9, 01-99

or 001- 100) or #9 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5.

3. Dial the outside number to which your calls should be forwarded.

4. (Keyset only) Press HOLD.

5. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key ßashes.

To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4.OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17) OR

At SLT, lift handset and dial *4.

2. Dial 6 + HOLD.

3. Press SPK (or hang up at SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops ßashing.

Related Programs


13-01 Abbreviated Dial Function Setup

14-05 Trunk Group

14-06 Trunk Group Routing

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-16 Trunk Group Routing for Networking

Networking ◆ 51

FeaturesCall Forwarding with Follow Me

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Call Forwarding with Follow MeThe extension user can program Call Forward Follow-Me to extension in a networked system. When the extension with the Follow Me setting receives an incoming call, both the original exten-sion and the programmed destination extension starts ringing.

With a networked system, when Call Forward Follow-Me is enabled, there is a slight difference in the telephone�s display. With a single system, the destination extension displays the extension name for the phone with Follow-Me enabled. With a networked system, the extension number is displayed.

Operation

To activate Call Forward Follow Me:

1. At a keyset other than your own, press idle CALL key and dial *2.OR

Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15). OR

At SLT other than your own, lift handset and dial *2.

2. Dial 3 + Dial your own extension number (i.e., the source).

3. Dial Call Forwarding Type: 2 = All Calls 3 = Outside calls only 4 = Intercom calls only

4. SPK (or hang up at SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key ßashes when Call For-

warding is activated.

To cancel Call Forward Follow Me:

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *2.OR

Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15).OR

At SLT, lift handset and dial *2.

2. Dial 0.

3. SPK (or hang up at SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key goes out.

Related Programs


11-11-07 Service Code of Follow Me

11-11-06 Call Forwarding (Select Option)

52 ◆ Networking

FeaturesCall Waiting / Camp On

Call Waiting / Camp On

Call Waiting / Camp OnWith Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line without hanging up. The user can also choose to hang up and Camp On to the call. With Call Waiting or Camp On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting/Camp On helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten.

With a networked system, camping on to an idle extension and Trunk Queuing/Camp On for a trunk port are not supported.

With a networked system, when Call Waiting/Camp On is enabled, there is a slight difference in the telephone�s display. With a single system, the target extension�s name is displayed on the phone which has enabled Call Waiting. With a networked system, the extension number is displayed.

Operation

To use Call Waiting or to Camp-On to a busy extension:

1. Call busy extension.

2. Dial 2 or press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

3. Wait on the line for the extension user to become available or hang up and your extension will ring when the extension user becomes available.

To Camp-On to a trunk, see Trunk Queuing.

To cancel a Camp-On request:

1. Hang up.

2. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial 870. OR

At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35). OR

At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

Related Programs


11-12-05 Service Code: Setting Camp On

11-12-06 Service Code: Cancelling Camp On

11-16-05 One-Digit Service Code: Camp On

Networking ◆ 53


CallbackWhen an extension user calls a co-worker that doesn�t answer, they can leave a Callback request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to Þnd it idle.

The system processes Callback requests as follows:

1. Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.

2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.

3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.If caller A doesn�t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.

4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.

Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset. When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring.

Conditions● An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.

● Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys do not support Call Waiting/Camp On Programmable Function keys (code 35).

Operation

To place a Callback:

1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.

2. Dial 2 or press Callback key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).

3. Hang up.

4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through

after your co-worker uses their phone for the Þrst time.If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly

busy extension when you lift the handset. If you don�t have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call.

To cancel a Callback:

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and Dial 870.OR

At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).OR

At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

54 ◆ Networking


Related Programs


15-02-11 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Callback Automatic Answer

15-07-01 Programming Function Keys

20-01-07 System Options - Callback Ring Duration Time

20-01-09 System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time

Networking ◆ 55

FeaturesCaller ID Display

Caller ID Display

Caller ID DisplayCaller ID information can be sent to the target extension across a networked system and show the Caller ID on the phone�s display. The ABB Name is also shown on LCD by searching ABB table at the target system.

OperationA DID call routed directly to a remote extension will send the Caller ID information to the remote system. The DID name set in Program 22-11-03 is also sent to the remote system. At the remote system, the Caller ID information will be displayed, or if the Caller ID number matches an Abbre-viated Dial entry, the Abbreviated Dial name will be displayed.

A trunk call that is Þrst answered and then transferred to a remote extension will display the Caller ID number and the DID name. The Abbreviated Dial name will NOT be displayed.

When a parked call is answered across the network, the call will not display Caller ID information to the party picking up the parked call.

Related Programs➻ 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name

DeÞne the abbreviated dialing number and name. The ABB name will be shown on a phone�s LCD when the ABB table has a matching number with the incoming Caller ID. The common abbreviated number table is used to search for a match.

➻ 20-09-02 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Caller ID Display20-09-03 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Sub Address IdentiÞcation


01 Abbreviated Dialing Data

1-9, 0, *, #, Pause (Press line key 1),

Recall/Flash (Press line key 2), @ for Additional Digit for ISDN Functionality (Press line key 3)

(max. 24 digits)

No Setting

02 Name Max. 12 Characters No Setting

Item No. Item Input

data

Default

COS 01-14 COS 15

02 Caller ID DisplayEnables/disables the Caller ID display at an extension.

0-Off1-On

0 0

03 Sub Address IdentiÞcationDeÞne whether an extension displays the Caller Sub-Address.

0-Off1-On

0 0

56 ◆ Networking

FeaturesCentral Office Calls, Placing

Central Office Calls, Placing

Central OfÞce Calls, Placing: Seizing a trunk in a networked systemThe system allows a user to seize a trunk in a networked system using the following methods:

If you wish to allow an extension on System A to dial an access code to access a speciÞc trunk on the remote System B. You could use F-Routing and set the systems up as follows:

● Set up a F-route in Site B. For example, using the digit 7, go to Program 11-01 and for digit 7, enter under 7x, Digit = 1, Type = F-Route.

● In Program 44-02-01, under F-Route 1, enter dial data as 7 and additional data as 1.

● In Program 44-05-01, under route table 1, detour order 1, enter the trunk group (101, would be Program 10-27 system 01).

● At Site A also do the same setup, except in Program 44-05-01 put the trunk group you want to access and also delete 1 digit.

When someone from Site B dials "7" they will hear dial tone from Site A.

Conditions● When using loop keys to make an outgoing call via the network, the loop key will not light.

OperationThe operation is automatic, the user dials the trunk access code in the normal way.

Abbreviated Dial numbers will follow the trunk routing if set to TRG 0 in Program 13-05.

For IP Networking, ensure that the VOIPU �trunk� ports are in their own trunk group in Program 14-05. Do not create a trunk group with a mix of VoIP trunk ports and any other trunk port type. VoIP trunk ports should not be seized directly via line keys or trunk access (Service Codes 9, #9 or 804).

Method of Outgoing Available Note

SpeciÞed Trunk Access (#9 + the trunk number) No

SpeciÞed Trunk Group Access (804 + group number) No

Trunk Route Access (9) Yes

ARS/F-Route Yes See ARS/F-Route

Networking ◆ 57

FeaturesCentral Office Calls, Placing

Related ProgramsThe following example indicates the setting required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B).

Program System � A System � B

Program 14-06-01Trunk Group Routing

Route 1101 (Route to System ID 1)

Route 11 (Route to Trunk Group 1)

Program 21-02-01Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Extension 301 (which make a call via networking)1 (Route 1)This setting is referenced in Program 14-06-01

Program 21-16-01Trunk Group Routing for Networking

System ID 1Route 1This setting is referenced in Program 14-06-01

58 ◆ Networking

FeaturesChannel Release Link

Channel Release Link

Channel Release LinkThe Channel Release Link feature allows for media gateway channels to be released when they are no longer needed. For example, when a trunk from System A rings an extension in System B, if the call is answered by a user or voice mail in System B and then transferred back to an extension in System A, the following occurs:

● On the initial call, there is one media gateway channel used on each site.

● When System B places the call on hold and transfers it to System A, another media gateway channel is used in System B.

● When System A answers the call, all media gateway channels are released.

OperationNone (automatic)

Related ProgramsNone (automatic)

Networking ◆ 59

FeaturesConference

Conference

ConferenceThe user can create a Conference call to include a user in a networked system.

Operation

To establish a Conference:

Keyset

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.

2. Press CONF or Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).

3. Dial extension you want to add. OR

Access outside call OR

Retrieve call from Park orbit. To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group code. You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.

4. When called party answers, press CONF, Conference key, or HOLD key twice. If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the sys-

tem�s Conference limit.

5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.

Single Line Set / 2-Button Telephone

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.

2. Single Line SetHookßash and dial #1.2-Button TelephonePress HOLD and dial #1.

3. Dial extension you want to add.OR

Access trunk call. OR

Retrieve call from Park orbit.

4. Single Line SetHookßash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.

OR Hookßash twice to set up the Conference. 2-Button TelephonePress HOLD and repeat step 3 to add more parties.

OR Press HOLD twice to set up the Conference.

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the sys-tem�s Conference limit.

60 ◆ Networking

FeaturesConference

Related Programs


15-02-24 Set the CONF key operation mode

15-07-01 Programming Function Keys - Conference (code 07)

20-06-01 Calls of Service for Extensions

20-13-08 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Conference

Networking ◆ 61

FeaturesDepartment Calling

Department Calling

Department CallingDepartment Group access is available via Networking. When the extension at System A tries to make a Department Call to System B, System A should have a numbering plan which deÞnes the Department Access code at System-B (must be deÞned as dial type 8, Networking in Program 11-01 : System Numbering).

The following Department Calling options are supported with the Networking feature.

Operation1. When dialing the Department access code for the networked system, the call is dialed in the

the same way normal.

2. A Department Call from the outgoing system will be routed to an available extension in the Department Group.

Program Number Mode Same as Single System

16-01-02 Department Calling Cycle Yes

16-01-03 Department Routing When Busy Yes

16-01-04 Hunting Mode No

16-01-05 All Ring Mode When a call is transferred to a Department Group with All Ring, there is a difference in operation. In a single system, an extension within the same system can transfer a call to a Department Group and the call will ring an extension within the Depart-ment Group once the transferring user hangs up. In a networked sys-tem, the transfer will not go through and the call will recall the extension performing the transfer.

16-01-06 STG Withdraw Mode No

16-01-07 Call Recall Restriction for STG No

16-01-08 Maximum Queuing Number No

16-01-10 Enhanced Hunting Mode No

62 ◆ Networking

FeaturesDepartment Calling

Related Programs


11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers

16-01 Department Group Basic Data Setup

16-02-01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions

22-07-01 DIL Assignment

22-11 DID

Networking ◆ 63

FeaturesDepartment Step Call

Department Step Call

Department Step CallAfter calling a busy Department Calling Group member in a networked system, an extension user can have Department Step Calling Quickly call another member in the group.

Operation

To make a Step Call:

You step through Extension Groups set in Program 16-02.

1. Place call to busy Department Group member. OR

Place call to Department Group pilot number.

2. Dial #.OR

Press Step Call key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 36).

3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.

Related Programs


11-12-07 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Step Call

11-16-01 Single Digit Service Code Setup - Step Call


20-08-12 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Department Step Calling

64 ◆ Networking

FeaturesDirect Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)An incoming DID call can be routed to an extension in a networked system.

OperationFor incoming DID calls, the system refers to Program 22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion to determine how to route the call. If the number is determined to be in the networked system, the call will be routed to the proper system node.

It is possible to route to a Department Group pilot number at a remote system - the group can be set to all ring mode. It is not possible to route a DID call to a ring group at the remote system.

The timer value is determined by the system data at the incoming trunk side if the incoming DID call is transferred to a ring group due to the no-answer timer expiring.

Related Programs


22-02 Incoming Service Type

22-09 DID Basic Data Setup

22-10 DID Conversion Area Setup

22-11 DID Conversion Table Data Setup

22-12 DID Transferred Destination Setup

Networking ◆ 65

FeaturesDirect Inward Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Line (DIL)A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL�s phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.

The outside party can call an extension at a networked system, if the DIL trunk is set to route to the other system.

Operation1. An outside caller places a call to a DIL trunk.

2. The call will be routed to the networked system if the DIL target is deÞned as an extension in the networked system in Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment.

Related Programs


22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup

22-07 DIL Assignment

22-08 Second IRG Setup for Unanswered DIL/IRG

66 ◆ Networking

FeaturesDirect Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)Networking allows DISA callers to place a call to an extension in a networked system. Some sys-tem features can also be accessed from the networked system. The Class of Service is determined by the password entered by the DISA caller. The password table is referred to by the system on the incoming trunk side.

The Networking feature allows the following DISA services as allowed in Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M.

Operation

To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):

1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.

2. Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.

3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).

4. Wait for a second unique dial tone.

5. Dial an extension (301-556).OR

Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.OR

Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).OR

Dial #9 + a trunk number (1-200) for an outside call.OR

Dial 0 for the operator.OR

Dial 803 + an External Paging Zone number (1-8 or 0 for All Call).If the received digits are analyzed as a networked extension number, the call is routed

to the proper network node.

Program Number Service Name Available

20-14-02 Trunk Route Access Yes

20-14-03 Trunk Group Access No

20-14-04 Common Abbreviated dialing No

20-14-05 Operator access Yes

20-14-06 Internal Paging No

20-14-07 External Paging Yes

20-14-08 SpeciÞed trunk access No

20-14-09 Forced trunk disconnect No

20-14-10 Call Forward setting No

20-14-11 Break In No

Networking ◆ 67

FeaturesDirect Inward System Access (DISA)

Related Programs


20-14 Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M

22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup

25-01 DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup

25-02 DID/DISA VRS Error Message

25-03 DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group with Incorrect Dialing

25-04 DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group with No Answer/Busy

25-05 DID/DISA Error Message Setup

25-06 DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup

25-07 System Timers for DID/DISA

25-08 System timer for DID/DISA Service

25-09 Class of Service for DISA User

25-10 Trunk Group Routing for DISA

25-11 Toll Restriction Class for DISA

25-12 Individual Trunk Group Routing for DISA

25-13 System Option DISA Service

68 ◆ Networking

FeaturesFax Over Networking

Fax Over Networking

Fax Over NetworkingThe purpose of Aspire Networking is to be able to connect several systems and have them appear to operate as one system. However, some restrictions still apply. Using software prior to 4.93, with Fax Over Networking using H.323 trunks, if a resource is busy, the operation cannot be performed efÞciently. Although the operation will continue, if there is no G.711 compression, there is no resending procedure with RTP and reliability can be a problem.

Software 4.93 and higher enhances this operation to provide better performance. With IP network-ing, the modem signal of the fax relay uses H.245. This enhancement only applies to G3.

Related Programs

Examples:

FAX Relay with SLT Extension (G3)

Setup:● System A

Program15-03-03 = G3 Fax 1 (special)Program 84-12-32 = 2 (Each Port Mode)

● System BProgram 15-03-03 = G3 Fax 1 (special)Program 84-12-32 = 2 (Each Port Mode)


15-03-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type� For each extension to be used for Fax Relay, deÞne this option as �2�

(special).

84-12-32 H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup - Fax Relay� Select "2" (each port mode).

84-01-36 through84-01-59

H.323 Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup� Set the Fax Relay options as required.

Networking ◆ 69

FeaturesFax Over Networking

FAX Relay with Trunks

Setup:● System A

Program15-03-03 = G3 Fax 1 (special)Program 84-12-32 = 2 Each Port Mode

● System BProgram 84-01-59 = 2 specialProgram 84-12-32 = 2 Each Port Mode

● System CProgram15-03-03 = G3 Fax 1 (special)Program 84-01-59 = 2 Each Port Mode

70 ◆ Networking

FeaturesHold

Hold

HoldThis feature is available with no changes in programming or operation.

The MOH tone is sourced at the local system where the caller is hearing the hold tone. For exam-ple, a user at System A places a call to system B and puts the call on hold. The MOH source at sys-tem B will be heard by the held user.

While the caller is on hold, the networking speech path will be reserved, waiting for the call to be taken off hold.

Networking ◆ 71

FeaturesHotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Hotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Hotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS)An extension user can have a Hotline key to a networked extension. The Hotline or DSS console keys can display the status lamp indication of an extension in a networked system. The key will show the status for idle, busy, DND and Call Forward Immediate.

The lamp status, may not be updated immediately. Status will be updated based on the time interval speciÞed in Program 20-01-04. Set this program to �30� on all systems for proper BLF operation.

The status for ACD extensions or virtual extensions will not be sent via networking. It is still possi-ble to have a Hotline / DSS key for an ACD or virtual extension, but it will not show any BLF infor-mation - the key can only be used to call the extension.

Operation

To place a call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press Hotline key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 01 + partner�s extension number + HOLD)You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.

To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press Hotline key.

2. Announce call, press the TRF soft key (optional), and hang up.OR

Press the TRF soft key or hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced. If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call.

To answer a call from your Hotline partner:

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.OR

If your telephone rings, lift handset.

Calling an extension from your DSS Console:

1. (Optional for 110-Button Consoles) Press EXT.1 or EXT.2 to select the range.

2. Press DSS Console key. If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1. If you don�t have Handsfree, you must lift handset to speak.

72 ◆ Networking

FeaturesHotline / Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Related Programs


20-01-04 System Options - Network BLF IndicationSet this program to �30� on all systems.

20-02-03 System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - BLF Control

20-13-06 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signaling


30-02-01 110-Button DSS Console Key Assignment

30-05-01 DSS Console Lamp Table

Networking ◆ 73

FeaturesIntercom

Intercom

IntercomAn extension user can make an intercom call to a networked system if the networked extensions are deÞned with the Network Access Code (Program 11-01, Dial Type = 8).

A user can change the signaling type for the intercom call they place to either a voice announce or ringing call to extension in a networked system.

Conditions● The system does not support the use of the Voice Over feature to an extension across the

network.

Operation

To place an Intercom call:

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key.OR

At single line telephone, lift handset.

2. Dial extension number (or 0 for your operator).Your call may voice-announce or ring the called extension. Dial 1 to change the way

your call alerts the called extension.If the extension you call is busy or doesn�t answer, you can dial another extension

without hanging up.

Related Programs


11-12-06 Service code of Voice/Signal Change

11-16-03 One digit service code of Voice/Signal Change


20-08-01 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Intercom Calls

74 ◆ Networking

FeaturesKeep Alive Operation

Keep Alive Operation

Keep Alive OperationThe Keep Alive operation will check that the distant end is available. A dummy message is sent that the distant end must respond to, and, if no response is received the line will be taken out of service. Keep Alive operation is effective on ISDN BRI/PRI and IP Networking connections.

OperationThe response to the keep alive message is automatic.

The generation of the keep alive message is set by Program 10-31-01, when the timer is set. If the timer is set to 0, the keep alive generation is turned off.

The retry count for a keep alive message that is not responded to is also set at the originating system.

The line will be placed back in service when the line is active and a response has been received to a keep alive message.

The keep alive operation will only take place if the message is sent and not responded to by the dis-tant end. If the message is not sent (for example if ISDN layer 1 is not active), then the keep alive operation will not take place.

When the keep alive operation occurs, the link will be taken out of service:

● Any calls that are in progress will be released.

● Park Hold orbits will be released.

● No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.

Related Programs


10-31-01 The interval of the keep alive time. The interval can be set from 0 to 65535 seconds. When set to 0, the keep alive is disabled.

10-31-02 Retry Count. The system will retry the keep alive message, after the dis-tant end does not respond. After this count, the line will be taken out of service.

Networking ◆ 75

FeaturesLast Number Redial

Last Number Redial

Last Number RedialLast Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. When used with a networked system, the system can use the same trunk on which the call was originally placed, even if the trunk is a trunk in another system.

Operation

To redial your last call:

1. Without lifting the handset, press LND.The last dialed number is displayed.

2. To redial the last number, press #.OR

Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing the LND or VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.

3. Lift the handset or press SPK to place the call.The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and

dials the last number dialed.OR

1. At keyset, press idle line key (optional).The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.

2. Press LND.OR

1. At keyset, press idle CALL key.OR


2. Dial #5.The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and

dials the last number dialed.

Related Programs


11-12-12 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Last Number Dial

15-02-13 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Redial List Mode


76 ◆ Networking

FeaturesMessage Waiting

Message Waiting

Message WaitingThis feature can be used when placing an intercom call to a networked extension and receives either no answer or hears a busy tone.

With a networked system, when a Message Waiting has been left, there is a slight difference in the tele-phone�s display. With a single system, the extension�s name which left the message is displayed. With a networked system, the extension number is displayed.

Operation

To leave a Message Waiting:

1. Call busy or unanswered extension.

2. Dial 0 or press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38)

3. Hang up.With keyset phones, the MW LED lights.

To answer a Message Waiting:

When you have a message, your MW LED ßashes fast for keysets.

1. At a keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *0.OR

Press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38).OR

At single line telephones, lift the handset and dial *0.If the called extension doesn�t answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to

automatically leave them a message. Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to ßash, you have new messages in your �Voice Mail� mailbox or a new �General Message�. Go to �To check your messages� below.

Related Programs


11-11-09 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Answer Message Waiting

11-11-10 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Cancel All Messages Waiting

11-11-11 Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Cancel Message Waiting

11-16-07 Single Digit Service Code Setup: Message Waiting

20-13-07 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Message Waiting

Networking ◆ 77

FeaturesOperator, Centralized

Operator, Centralized

Operator, CentralizedIt is possible to have a centralized network operator extension that can be dialed with the operator access code (0).

Calls to the operator will be queued and answered in order. Up to 32 calls can be queued at the operator extension. The quantity of network calls that can queue at the operator may be limited by the quantity of networking channels available.

OperationThe network numbering plan must be set up to route the operator access code (0) to the system that has the operator extension. The operator extension must be set in Program 20-17-01.

Centralized Operator

● At System A, extension 2200 must be set as the operator extension in Program 20-17-01.

● At System B, dial 0 must be set as networking in Program 11-01 and routed to the node ID of System A.

● Users at System A and B can access the operator by dialing 0.

System A System B

Centralized Operator(Extension 2200)

78 ◆ Networking

FeaturesPaging

Paging

PagingAn extension user can make internal or external pages to a networked system. Paging to a net-worked system can only be activated by dialing a service code and the target network�s system ID.

Operation

To Make an Internal Page

1. Dial 801.

2. Dial # and the system ID.The system ID must be dialed as 2 digits (ex: #02).

3. Dial the Paging Zone number (00-64). Dialing 00 calls All Call External Paging.

4. Make announcement to the networked system.

5. Press SPK to hang up.

To Make an External Page

1. Dial 803.


3. Dial the Paging Zone number (0-9). Dialing 0 calls All Call Internal Paging.



To Make a Combined Page

1. Dial *1.


3. Dial the Paging Zone number (0-9). Dialing 0 calls All Call Combined Paging.



Networking ◆ 79

FeaturesPaging

Related Programs


11-12-19 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Internal Group Paging

11-12-20 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - External Paging

11-12-24 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Combined Paging

31-01 System Options for Internal/External Paging

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

31-03 Internal Paging Group Settings

31-04 External Paging Zone Group

31-07 Combined Paging Assignment

80 ◆ Networking

FeaturesPark

Park

ParkPark places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. Any extension user who is in the same Park Group as the extension which placed the call in Park can answer the call.

With software prior to 2.67, users cannot pick up calls parked across the network, so ensure that extensions at each site are programmed in their own separate Park Groups in Program 24-03.

With software 2.67 or higher, users can pick up calls parked across the network. For example, when an extension user in Park Group 3 within System A places a call in Park, the extension users in Park Group 3 at any connected system can retrieve the call by pressing the ßashing park key or dialing a service code. If you do not want the Park Orbits to be available to other users within the network, then place the extension at each site in a a different Park Group in Program 24-03.

To allow users throughout the network to answer a parked call, all the systems must be interconnected to each other. For example, System A connected to System B, System B con-nected to System C, System C connected to System A.

With a single system, when two users within the same Park Group try to place a call in the same page zone at the same time, one user will get the zone while the other user�s call will either ring back or it will remain an active call, depending on how the park zone was accessed. With Network-ing, if both users try to access the same zone, one user will get the zone, while the other will hear ringback, at which time they can park the call in a different zone.

When a parked call is answered across the network, the call will not display Caller ID information to the party picking up the parked call.

Operation

To Park a call in a system orbit:

You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.

1. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).The Park key LED lights. If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.

2. Use Paging to announce call.

3. Press SPK to hang up.If not picked up, the call will recall to you.

OR

1. At keyset or 2-Button telephone, press HOLD.OR

At a 500/2500 single line telephone, hookßash.

2. Dial #6 and the Park orbit (1-64).If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.

3. Use Paging to announce call.

Networking ◆ 81

FeaturesPark

4. Press SPK to hang up. If not picked up, the call will recall to you. Note: The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 24-01-06). The call

rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24-01-02). The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time - then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback Time. The call continues to cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up.

To pick up a parked call:

1. Lift handset.

2. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).OR

1. At keyset or 2-Button telephone, press idle CALL key. OR


2. Dial *6 and the Park orbit (1-64).

Related Programs


11-12-31 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Placing a Call in Park

11-12-32 Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Retrieving Call from Park

20-11-19 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) � Normal/Extended ParkIf enabled, the recall timer set in Program 24-01-07 is used. If this option is disabled, the timer in Program 24-01-06 is used.

24-01-06 System Options for Hold - Park Hold Recall Timer � Normal

24-01-07 System Options for Hold - Park Hold Recall Timer � Extended

24-03-01 Park Group assignment for extensions

82 ◆ Networking

FeaturesRingdown Extension, Internal/External

Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Ringdown Extension, Internal/ExternalA networked system can have a phone deÞned as a Ringdown Extension to dial either an internal or external number.

Operation

To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed:

1. Lift handset.If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset.Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom

call before your ringdown goes through.If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call will voice announce.

If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring.

Related Programs



20-08-09 Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Hotline/Extension Ringdown

21-01-09 System Options for Outgoing Calls - Ringdown Extension Timer

21-11-01 Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments

Networking ◆ 83

FeaturesSelectable Display Messaging

Selectable Display Messaging

Selectable Display MessagingAn extension user can select a preprogrammed Selectable Display Message for their extension. This message will be displayed on an incoming intercom caller�s LCD when they call the extension in a networked system.

Operation

To select a message:

1. Press idle CALL key + dial *4.OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).OR

Press idle CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + enter digits to append, if needed + SPK to hang up. Skip the remaining steps.

2. Dial 3 + Message number (01-20).Use VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through the messages.

3. (Optional for messages 1-8 and 10)Dial the digits you want to append to the message.

You can append messages 1-8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back). You enter the time in 24-hour format, but it displays in 12-hour format.


To cancel a message:

1. Press idle CALL key + dial *4.OR

Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).OR

Press idle CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + SPK to hang up.

2. Dial 3.


Related Programs


20-13-19 Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Selectable Display Messaging

20-16 Selectable Display Messages

84 ◆ Networking

FeaturesToll Restriction

Toll Restriction

Toll RestrictionToll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. When accessing a trunk at a remote system, the Toll Restriction Class of Service is deÞned by the calling extension�s system, but the Toll Restriction tables will be used from the system which has the outgoing trunk. The Toll restric-tion class number is sent to the remote system, the remote system will use the class number to deÞne the Toll Restriction tables to use.

Since the restriction table is used for the system which has the outgoing trunk, the deÞnition of the Class of Service may be different, unless all Toll Restriction Classes of Service and Toll Restriction Tables are deÞned the same between systems.

OperationExample:The extension user in System A, which has a Toll Restriction Class 2, dials an outside party after seizing a trunk from a networked system (System B). The received digits are compared to the Class 2 Restriction Table in System B. The call is then either allowed or rejected based on this table.

Related Programs


21-04 Toll Restriction Class Assignment for Extensions

21-05 Toll Restriction Class Setup

21-06 Toll Restriction Table Setup

Networking ◆ 85

FeaturesTransfer

Transfer

TransferThe following types of Transfer are available with Networking:

● Screened Transfer

● Unscreened Transfer

● Transfer (to busy extension) without holding

Call Transfer to i-Series System Via VoIP ConnectionWhen an Aspire system is connected via a VoIP connection to an i-Series system in a tie-line type setup, in order to transfer calls from the Aspire system to the i-Series, in addition to the VoIP pro-gramming, set up the Flexible Routing Tables as follows:

● Program 44-05-01 : ARS/F-Route Table ; Table Number 1 = 9 (Trunk Group for Aspire VoIP Trunk)

● Program 10-23-02 : H.323 System Interconnection, IP Address ; System Number 3 = 172.16.9.10 (IP Address for i-Series System)

● Program 10-23-04 : H.323 System Interconnection, Alias Address ; System Number 3 = 4 (For Dial 4 Calls)

With this programming, the Aspire system will wait for the Trunk Interdigit Timer to expire before dialing out after an i-Series extension (4xxx) is dialed.

If the F-Routing is set up with Program 44-05-01; Table Number 1 set to 103 (Networking) and Program 10-27-01; System ID 3 = 172.16.9.10 (IP Address for i-Series), though the i-Series system will be able to transfer calls to the Aspire, the Aspire system will not be able to transfer to the i -Series.

Conditions● Calls cannot be transferred across a network to an ACD group�s master number.

● Using a DSS Console to transfer calls across the network requires the DSS key to be pressed twice to complete the transfer.

Operation

Transferring Trunk Calls

To Transfer a trunk call to a co-worker�s extension:

1. At keyset or 2-Button telephone, press HOLD.OR

At 500/2500 single line telephone, hookßash.You hear Transfer dial tone.

2. Dial co-worker�s extension number.If the extension is busy or doesn�t answer, you can dial another extension number or

press the line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On.

SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookßash. If a call has been transferred and the SLT user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing ** and the extension number to which it had been transferred.

86 ◆ Networking

FeaturesTransfer

Using a DSS Console to transfer calls across the network requires the DSS key to be pressed twice to complete the transfer.

3. Announce call and hang up.If you don�t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF or your Transfer

Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.If your co-worker doesn�t want the call, press the ßashing line key to return to the call.SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookßash. If a call has been transferred and

the SLT user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing ** and the extension number to which it had been transferred.

If you don�t want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement.

Transferring to Busy Extension Without HoldingRequires setting the hold recall timer (Program 24-01-01) in both the originating sys-

tem and the target system.

To Transfer without holding (keyset only):

1. Dial the co-worker�s extension number.A busy tone is heard.

2. Press the TRF soft key.The call will wait for the busy co-worker to become free and then ring.

Transferring Intercom Calls

To Transfer your Intercom call:

1. At keyset, press HOLD.OR

At single line telephone, hookßash.

2. Dial extension to receive your call.If the extension is busy, doesn�t answer or does not want the call, you can dial another

extension number or press the lit CALL key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On.

SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookßash. If a call has been transferred and the SLT user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing ** and the extension number to which it had been transferred.

Using a DSS Console to transfer calls across the network requires the DSS key to be pressed twice to complete the transfer.

3. Announce your call and hang up.With Automatic On Hook TransferWhen you hang up, the call is automatically transferred.Without Automatic On Hook TransferYou must press your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.To Transfer the call unscreened, press your Transfer Programmable Function Key and

hang up without making an announcement.

Networking ◆ 87

FeaturesTransfer

Related Programs


20-11-06 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Unscreened Transfer

20-11-07 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Without Holding

20-11-08 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Display

20-11-18 Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - No Recall

24-02-01 System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer

88 ◆ Networking

FeaturesVoice Mail, Centralized

Voice Mail, Centralized

Voice Mail, Centralized Networking will support the use of a single voice mail for the entire network. A user may call into the voice mail from anywhere in the network and perform most functions as if the voice mail were located on their premises. With software 4.94 or higher, the Aspire Mail or IntraMail voice mail can be used. Prior to software 4.94, only the use of an external voice mail (any NVM-Series voice mail) connected to analog ports is supported for centralized voice mail.

With a networked system, when voice mail is busy, there is a slight difference in the telephone�s display. With a single system, the extension calling a busy voice mail will see WAITING VOICE MAIL on their display. With a networked system, the extension will display CALLING XXX (XXX = extension number).

The Centralized Voice Mail can be connected to any Aspire in the Network, the only consideration is the amount of networking trafÞc expected from each of the sites. The Aspire Network will always have a limit to the number of calls that can be made, whether this is due to the amount of ISDN channels or the bandwidth available on the IP network.

It is recommended to install the Centralized Voice System at the site that will be the heaviest user of voice mail services - this will keep the amount of network trafÞc to a minimum. If Automated Attendant is required, it is also recommended to install the Centralized Voice Mail at the site that will receive the trunk calls destined for Auto Attendant. Again, this is to keep the amount of net-work trafÞc to a minimum.

OperationPilot CallWhen the extension in System B dials the centralized voice mail access number (Program 45-01-07), then the voice mail in System A is accessed as the centralized voice mail.

Service CodesWhen the voice mail service code (Program 11-12-51) is dialed, the system calls either the voice mail at the same site as the user, or if the centralized voice mail access number is deÞned in Pro-gram 45-01-07, then the centralized voice mail is called.

One-Digit Service CodeIf an extension user hears either a busy signal or a ring back tone when placing an intercom call and dials the one-digit service code for voice mail, the call is connected to the voice mail at the same site, or if the centralized voice mail access number is deÞned in Program 45-01-07, then the central-ized voice mail is called.

Voice Mail Message KeyIf an extension user presses their Voice Mail Message key (Program 15-07 or SC 851: 77), the voice mail at the same site as the user is called, or if the centralized voice mail access number is deÞned in Program 45-01-07, then the centralized voice mail is called.

Conversation RecordingIf an extension user presses their Conversation Recording key (Program 15-07 or SC 851: 78), the voice mail at the same site as the user is called, or if the centralized voice mail access number is deÞned in Program 45-01-07, then the centralized voice mail is called and the conversation is recorded to that voice mail.

Networking ◆ 89


Automatic AttendantIf an extension user presses their Automatic Attendant Message key (Program 15-07 or SC 851: 79), the voice mail at the same site as the user is called, or if the centralized voice mail access num-ber is deÞned in Program 45-01-07, then the centralized voice mail is called.

Incoming Calls - Normal TrunksIf centralized voice mail is set in Program 22-05:103 as the destination of an incoming call, this call is automatically transferred to the centralized voice mail.

If 102 (in-skin/external voice mail) is selected for the ring group instead of 103, the voice mail within the extension�s own system will be called.

No Answer at Incoming RingIf centralized voice mail is set in Program 22-08:103 as the destination, normal incoming calls or DIL calls which receive no answer are transferred to the centralized voice mail


Transferred Destination for Each DID Translation TableIf centralized voice mail is set in Program 22-11-05: and 22-11-06:103 for the transferred destina-tion for each DID translation table, then the call will be transferred to the system which has the cen-tralized voice mail.


DID, DISA: Mis-Dial CallsIf the centralized voice mail is set in Program 25-03:103 as the transferred destination for DID/DISA mis-dial calls, then the call will be transferred to the centralized voice mail.


DID, DISA: No Answer and Busy CallsIf the centralized voice mail is set in Program 25-04:103 as the transferred destination for DID/DISA no answer and mis-dial calls, then the call will be transferred to the centralized voice mail.


Voice Mail Soft Keys with NSLThe NSL link enables voice mail soft keys when using the Aspire Mail voice mail. On a networked system, the NSL link must be enabled on the master system (Program 45-01-10).

NSL is not available for external analog voice mails or the IntraMail.

90 ◆ Networking


System ConÞguration ExampleWhen using only local voice mail(s), refer to Voice Mail, Local (page 93).

Only Centralized Voice Mail

● The inbound and outbound calls in Systems A and B can access the centralized voice mail (600).

● Program 11-07-01 must be set to none (for the voice mail group) in System-A, otherwise, the operation of the centralized voice mail will be disabled.

● Trunk calls must be routed to ring group 103 (Centralized Voice Mail) in System A or B. A trunk routed to ring group 102 (Local Voice Mail) will fail.

● The DID voice mail tag (@xxx) can be used in Program 22-11-02 at System A and B.

● The voice mail function key (service code 851 + 77), conversation record key (service code 851 + 78) and auto attendant key (service code 851 + 79) can be used at System A and B.

System A System B

11-01-01 Dial 6x = Type 2(Intercom)

11-01-01 Dial 6x = Type 8(Networking)

11-07-01 Group 64 = None 11-07-01 None

15-03-01 For each voice mail extension = Dial Pulse (0)

15-03-01 For each voice mail extension = Dial Pulse (0)

15-03-03 For each voice mail extension = Special (1)

15-03-03 For each voice mail extension = Special (1)

16-02-01 For each voice mail extension = Group 64 and set the priority

(1-64)

16-02-01 None

45-01-01 0 45-01-01 0

45-01-07 600 45-01-07 600

45-01-08 64 45-01-08 None

With Aspire Mail / Aspire

Mail DMS Only:

45-01-10

Enabled (1) With Aspire Mail / Aspire

Mail DMS Only:

45-01-10

Disabled (0)

SYSTEM A SYSTEM B

CENTRALIZED VOICE MAIL (600)

Networking ◆ 91


Related Programs


11-01 System Numbering Plan

11-07 Department Group Pilot Calling Number

11-12-51 Service Code (Call Own Mailbox)

15-03-01 Set the extensions for voice mail to �dial pulse�

15-03-03 Set the extensions for voice mail to �special�

15-07-01 Programmable Function Keys� Conversation Record : 78� Voice Mail Key : 77 + extension number� Auto Attendant Key : 79 + extension number

16-02 Department Group

22-05 Destination for normal incoming ringing

22-08 Destination for no answer

22-11-05 Transferred destination-1 for each DID translation table

22-11-06 Transferred destination-2 for each DID translation table

22-12 Transferred destination for each DID translation table area

25-03 Destination for DID/DISA: Mis-Dial

25-04 Destination for DID/DISA: No Answer/Busy Status

45-01-01 Voice Mail Integration Options - Voice Mail Department Group Number

45-01-07 Voice Mail Integration Options - Mailbox Number

45-01-08 Voice Mail Integration Options - Networked Voice Mail Department Group Number

45-01-09 Voice Mail Integration Options - Networked Voice Mail Master Name

92 ◆ Networking

FeaturesVoice Mail, Local

Voice Mail, Local

Voice Mail, LocalWith a networked system, with each system having their own voice mail, in order for users to prop-erly connect to the correct voice mail when leaving a message, the programming must be set as described below.

PRI Networking

Each node on a networked Aspire system is deÞned in Program 10-03-11 : PCB Setup - Network-ing System Number for the desired PRI slot. In the local system (System 1), Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering has a digit deÞned for networking (example: 7x=8 (network)).

The ID entry in Program 10-03-11 must match the ID set in Program 11-01-01. Otherwise, callers could not press "8" to leave a message at a networked user�s voice mail. For example:

● In System 1 in Program 10-03-11 = 1, Program 11-01-01 7X=8, ID = 2.When System 1�s extension 301 calls System 2�s extension 401, then presses digit "8",

the user would hear a reorder tone.

● In System 1 in Program 10-03-11 = 1, Program 11-01-01 7X=8, ID = 1.When System 1�s extension 301 calls System 2�s extension 401, then presses digit "8",

the user will hear the voice mail message for extension 401.

Note that in order to assign a system ID, the "type" must temporarily be set to "8" (networking). Once the system ID has been assigned, you can change the type to the required entry (2).

PRI Networking With Two Local Voice Mails, Masters Must Have Different NumberingWhen programming a PRI network with each system having their own local voice mail, the master numbers for the voice mails must be deÞned in different series in Program 11-01. The second digit of the extension number can not be the same. For example, 700 and 701 will not work, however 700 and 710 can be used.

Related Programs

Step Program Number Title

1. 11-01-01 System Numbering PlanSet Program 11-01-01 to "8" (networking) for the

local and remote voice mail master numbers and deÞne the ID number.

2. 10-03-11 PCB Setup - Networking System NumberSet the local system ID in to the same entry deÞned

in Program 11-01-01.

3. 11-01-01 System Numbering PlanChange Program 11-01-01 for the local voice mail

master number back to "2" (extension number).

Networking ◆ 93


Refer to the example below:

IP Networking

Each node on an IP networked Aspire system is deÞned in Program 10-27-01 : IP System ID. For example, System A has ID 1 and System B system has ID 2 in Program 10-27-01. This must be the same in every node.

In Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering, if System 1 system (system ID 1) has 700 as the mas-ter number, the entry for "70" would be "2". System 2 system (system ID 2) has 710 as the master number, the entry for "71" would also be "2".

Note that in order to assign a system ID, the "type" must temporarily be set to "8" (networking). Once the system ID has been assigned, you can change the type to the required entry (2).

Connected Via

PRI

Program 10-03-11 : PCB Setup, Networking System Number

Program 10-03-11 : PCB Setup, Networking System Number

= 1 = 2

Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering

Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering

Digit 7:71 = 3 Digits

Type 8 (Networking)System ID: 1

70 = 3 DigitsType 2 (Extension)System ID: 1 (must temporarily change to Type 8 to be able to enter the system ID)


Type 2 (Extension)System ID: 2 (must temporarily change to Type 8 to be able to enter the system ID)

70 = 3 DigitsType 8 (Networking)System ID: 2

Voice Mail 700

System 1 System 2Voice Mail 710

94 ◆ Networking


The system ID deÞned in Program 11-01-01 is where the voice mail master number resides. Refer to the example below:

Transfer Network Trunk to Local Voice Mail Using Voice Mail Key

Requires Software 3.05 or HigherPrior to 3.05 software, IP or PRI network sites that had their own voice mail could not transfer a call into voice mail using the following steps if the inbound call originated in another site (for example, a call comes in to System A and it translates to an extension at System B):

● HOLD + the Voice Mail Programmable Function Key (Program 15-07 or SC 851 + 77) or MSG key (Program 15-02-26=1) + the extension number.

With software 3.05 or higher, this operation is now possible.

Conditions

● Note that if you have a local and central voice mail, you can not have the same mailbox number at each node. If both sites have the same mailbox, when transferring a call, it will be transferred into the local voice mail and not across the network.

● As this software change allows transferring to a general message by a Single Line Set, the fol-lowing two operations have different results between Networking Call Transfer and Internal Call Transfer.- Hold + Voice Mail Master Dial then hang up.- Hold + Service Code (Own Mailbox Access - *8) then hang up.

Connected ViaIP

Program 10-23-01 : H.323 System Interconnection

Program 10-23-01 : H.323 System Interconnection

System 1: Interconnect=Yes (1) IP Address: System 1




Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering Program 11-01-01 : System Numbering


Type 8 (Networking)System ID: 2

70 = 3 DigitsType 2 (Extension)System ID: 2 (must temporarily change to Type 8 to be able to enter the system ID)


Type 2 (Extension)System ID: 2 (must temporarily change to Type 8 to be able to enter the system ID)

70 = 3 DigitsType 8 (Networking)System ID: 1

Voice Mail 700

System 1 System 2Voice Mail 710

Networking ◆ 95


System ConÞguration ExamplesFor a Centralized Voice Mail, refer to Voice Mail, Centralized (page 89).

Only Local Voice Mail for One System

● The inbound and outbound calls in System-A can access the local voice mail (600), but the inbound and outbound calls in System-B can not reach the local voice mail (600). Access from System-B to the voice mail is available only when a called telephone (at System-A) has Call Forward set to the local voice mail (600).

● Users at System-B can not use any voice mail services (one-digit service code, voice mail function key [77], conversation record key [78] or auto attendant key [79]).

● The voice mail system should not have any mailboxes set for extension numbers in System B.

ConditionsThe local voice mail cannot be accessed from the remote system as it does not send any voice mail protocol signals (preventing the user from leaving a message, hearing a message, etc.).

In cases where a call is forwarded to the local voice mail from the remote voice mail, protocol sig-nals are sent only when the telephone which set the Call Forward is called from the other system.

System A System B

16-02-01 Voice Mail Port = Group 64 16-02-01 None

45-01-01 64 45-01-01 None

45-01-08 None 45-01-08 None

With Aspire Mail Only:

45-01-10

Enabled (1) With Aspire Mail Only:

45-01-10

Disabled (0)

11-07-01 Group 64 = 600 11-07-01 None

45-01-07 None 45-01-07 None

11-01-01 Dial 6x = Type 2 (Intercom)

11-01-01 Dial 6x = Type 8 (Networking)

SYSTEM A SYSTEM B

LOCAL VOICE MAIL (600)

96 ◆ Networking


Local Voice Mail at Each Aspire

● The inbound and outbound calls in System A can access the local voice mail (600).

● The inbound and outbound calls in System B can access the local voice mail (500).

● Access to the voice mail of the remote system is available only when a called telephone has Call Forward set to their local voice mail.

● Conversation record key (service code 851 + 78) and auto attendant key (service code 851 + 79) can be used.

● The voice mail function key (service code 851 + 77) can be used for access to the mailbox and Message Waiting.

● Users at System A or B can not use the voice mail function key (service code 851 + 77) or one-digit service code to access a called party�s mailbox when placing calls to a remote exten-sion. The voice mail function key should only be used when calling a local extension.

● The voice mail systems should not have any mailboxes set for extension numbers at the remote system.

System A System B

11-01-01 Dial 5x = Type 8 (Networking)Dial 6x = Type 2 (Intercom)

11-01-01 Dial 5x = Type 2 (Intercom)Dial 6x = Type 8 (Networking

11-07-01 Group 64 = 600 11-07-01 Group 64 = 500

16-02-01 Voice Mail Port = Group 64 16-02-01 Voice Mail Port = Group 64

45-01-01 64 45-01-01 64

45-01-07 None 45-01-07 None

With Aspire Mail

/ Aspire Mail DMS

Only:45-01-10

Enabled (1) With Aspire Mail

/ Aspire Mail DMS

Only:45-01-10

Enabled (1)

SYSTEM A SYSTEM B



Networking ◆ 97


- For Your Notes -

98 ◆ Networking

Programming

Programming

Section 3

Programming

Networking ◆ 99

Programming

- For Your Notes -

100 ◆ Networking

ProgrammingProgramming Basics

Programming Basics

Before Reading This Section This section provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a pro-gram, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this section, you Þnd out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory.

When you want to customize a feature, Þnd it in Section 1 and learn about it. (If you have trouble Þnding the feature, try cross-referencing it in the Index at the back of this book.) Section 1 will tell you what programs you have to change to get the operation you want. Then, look the program up in this section if you have any questions about how to enter the data.

How to Use This Section

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into the following headings:

Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are also included. When you Þrst install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that may apply to the program.

The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program�s access level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. Refer to How to Enter the Programming Mode (page 102) for a list of the system�s access levels and passwords.

Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program. You�ll want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a feature may have an effect on another feature that you didn�t intend.

Telephone Programming Instructions shows you how to enter the program�s data into system memory. For example:


2. 15-07-01

tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do, you�ll see the message �15-07-01 TEL301� on the Þrst line of the telephone display. This indicates the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for extension 301. The second row of the display �KY01 = *01� indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with the entry of *01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, see How to Enter the Pro-gramming Mode below.

Do not start customizing your system without Þrst reading Section 1, Setting Up the Networking Feature.

15-07-01 TEL301KY01 = *01 ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 101


How to Enter the Programming Mode

To enter the programming mode:

1. Go to any working display telephone.In a newly installed system, use extension 301 (port 1).

2. Do not lift the handset.

3. Press CALL1.

4. # * # *

5. Dial the system password + HOLD. Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the pass-

words, use Program 90-02.

Note: When changes are made to the following programs, the Aspire system must be restarted.

Password

Password User Name Level Programs at this Level

374772 NEC-I 1 (MF) All programs

12345678 ASPIRE 2 (IN) All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB

0000 ADMIN1 3 (SA) 10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11, 20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08, 30-03, 32-02, 40-02, 41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06, 41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10, 41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14, 41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03,

90-04, 90-06, 90-07, 90-18, 90-19

9999 ADMIN2 4 (SB) 13-04, 13-05, 13-06

10-12-01 10-16-01 80-02-03 84-04 84-06-07

10-12-02 10-16-02 80-02-04 84-05-01 84-06-08

10-12-03 10-16-03 80-03 84-05-02 84-06-09

10-12-04 10-16-04 80-04 84-06-01 84-06-10

10-13-01 20-01-03 84-03-01 84-06-02 84-06-11

10-13-02 47-01-01 84-03-02 84-06-03 84-09

10-13-03 80-01 84-03-06 84-06-04 84-10

10-14 80-02-01 84-03-07 84-06-05

10-15 80-02-02 84-03-08 84-06-06

102 ◆ Networking


How to Exit the Programming Mode

To exit the programming mode:

When you are done programming, you must be out of a program�s options to exit (pressing the MSG key will exit the program�s option).

1. Press MSG key to exit the program�s options, if needed.

2. Press SPK. You see, "Saving System Data" if changes to were to the system�s programming.

3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and will exit the phone to an idle mode.

To save a customer�s database, a blank PC-ATA card or CompactFlash with PCMCIA Adapter is required. Insert the card into the NTCPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the PC-ATA/CompactFlash card. (Program 90-04 is used to reload the cus-tomer data if necessary.) Note that a PC-ATA/CompactFlash card can only hold one cus-tomer database. Each database to be saved will require its own separate card.

Program ModeBase Service OP1 OP2

Networking ◆ 103


Using Keys to Move Around in the ProgramsOnce you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data and move around in the menus.

Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to . . .

0-9 and * Enter data into a program.

HOLD Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing Enter on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press HOLD to bypass the entry without changing it.

CONF Delete the entry to the left (like pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard).

MSG Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being viewed.

For example, if you�re programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing MSG will allow you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing MSG again will allow you to select a new program in the 15- series. Pressing MSG a third time will allow you to enter a new program beginning with �1�. Pressing MSG one last time will bring you to the beginning program display, allow-ing you to enter any program number.

FLASH Switch extension, line, etc. being programmed by pressing FLASH. The cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing FLASH again moves the cursor back to the middle row.

LINE KEYS Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These settings vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1 (on) to preset values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE 3 = 15, etc.

For programs with this option, the line key which currently matches the pro-grammed setting will light steady.

The display may also indicate Soft Keys which will allow you to select the values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed settings.)

LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.

LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/ßash into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.

LINE KEY 3 Program a @ into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.

VOL ▲ Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 301 to 302, 303, etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).

If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling forward.

VOL ▼ Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 301 to 302, 303,etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).

If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling backward

104 ◆ Networking


Programming Names and Text MessagesSeveral programs (e.g., Program 20-16: Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the Þrst character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key �2� three times. Press the key six times display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ � { | } ←←←← →→→→ Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

0 Enter characters: 0 ! � # $ % & � ( )Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

* Enter characters: * + , - . / : ; < = > ?Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: STA). Pressing # again = Space.

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.

FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the ßashing cursor and to the right.

Networking ◆ 105


Programming Names and Text MessagesSeveral programs (e.g., Program 20-16: Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the Þrst character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key �2� three times. Press the key six times display the lower case letter. The name can be up to 12 digits long.

With Software Prior to 2.05:

Key for Entering Names


1 Enter characters: 1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ � { | } ←←←← →→→→ Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

3 Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

0 Enter characters: 0 ! � # $ % & � ( )Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

* Enter characters: * + , - . / : ; < = > ?Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

Soft Key Left/Right Arrows

Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM) and moves cursor in the arrows direction.

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.

CLEAR Clear all the entries from the point of the ßashing cursor and to the right.

106 ◆ Networking


With Software 2.05+:

When using i-Series telephones on the Aspire system, not all the same characters are available. Refer to the following chart for the i-Series characters:


1 Enter characters:1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } →→→→ ←←←← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó

2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters:

0 ! � # $ % & � ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ * Enter characters:

* + , - . / : ; < = > ? π ∑ σ Ω ∞ ¢ £# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex: TOM).

Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.CLEAR Clear all the entries from the point of the ßashing cursor and to the right.


1 Enter characters:1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } →→→→ ←←←← å blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank

2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters:

0 ! � # $ % & � ( ) blank blank blank ä ö ü α ε θ* Enter characters:


Pressing # again = Space.CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.

CLEAR Clear all the entries from the point of the ßashing cursor and to the right.

Networking ◆ 107


Using Soft Keys For ProgrammingEach Aspire display telephone provides interactive soft keys for intuitive feature access. The options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system pro-gramming. Simply press the Soft Key located below the option you wish and the display will change accordingly.

Pressing the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ will scroll between the menus.

What the Soft Key Display Prompts MeanWhen using a display phone in programming mode, you will see various Soft Key options dis-played. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs.

_Program Mode

Base Service OP1 OP2

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

_Program Mode

Hard Mtnance

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

Soft key Display Prompts

If you press this Soft Key . . . The system will. . .

back Go back one step in the program display.

You can press VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ to scroll forwards or backwards through a list of Programs.

↑↑↑↑ Scroll down through the available programs.

↓↓↓↓ Scroll up through the available programs.

select Select the currently displayed program.

←←←← Move the cursor to the left.

→→→→ Move the cursor to the right.

−−−−1111 Move back through the available program options.

++++1111 Move forward through the available program options.

108 ◆ Networking

Programming10-03 : PCB Setup

10-03 : PCB Setup

DescriptionUse Program 10-03 : PCB Setup to setup and conÞrm the Basic ConÞguration data for each PCB. When changing a deÞned terminal type, Þrst set the type to �0� and then plug the new device in to have the system automatically deÞne it or you may have to reseat the PCB.

Note: The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed.

Note: The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro due to the win-dow layout of the applications. Refer to the program within the PCPro/WebPro application to determine the correct item number.

Level: Aspire S Aspire M/L/XL

IN � Available. � Available.

� Option 15 for S-Bus terminal alert tone requires software 2.63+.

� Option 16 for PRI is not available.

� Option 5 for T1 is not available.

� Expanded entries for ESIU, SLIU, VMSU, DIOPU, BRI and PRI PCBs is not available.

� Option 17 for BRI available with software 4.04+.

� Options 18 and 19 for ISDN Numbering Plan selection requires software 4.93+.

� Option 15 for S-Bus terminal alert tone requires software 2.63+.

� Option 16 for PRI available with software 2.63+.

� Default changed for Option 5 for T1 with software 2.65+.

� Expanded entries for Aspire XL and the ESIU, SLIU, VMSU, DIOPU, BRI and PRI PCBs requires software 4.0E+.

� Option 17 for BRI available with software 4.04+.

� Options 18 and 19 for ISDN Numbering Plan selection requires software 4.93+.

Networking ◆ 109


Input Data

For ESIU Unit

Physical Port Number Through Software 3.07: 01-16From Software 4.0E+: 01-32

B-Channel 1


01 Terminal Type 0 = Not set1 = Keyset/DSLT2 = SLT Adapter3 = -- Not used --4 = -- Not used --5 = -- Not used --6 = PGD (Paging)7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)8 = PGD (Doorbox)9 = PGD (ACI)10 = DSS Console11 = -- Not used --

0

02 Logical Port Number 0 = Not set1 = Keyset2 = SLT Adapter3 = Not used4 = Not used5 = 2DCI Adapter 1 - 326 = PGD (Paging)7 = PGD (for Tone Ringer) 1-4 or 1-8 8 = PGD (for Door Box) 1-4 or 1-89 = PGD (for Analog I/F) 1-8 or 1-9610 = DSS11 = Not used

0

03 Additional Data This option is reserved for future use.3 = Not used4 = Not used01-16 (port number) A port number is automatically set as the order which the terminal started.

0

04 Optional Installed Unit 1 0 = none1 = APR Module2 = APA Module3 = ADA Module4 = CTA Module5 = CTU Module

0

110 ◆ Networking


05 Optional Installed Unit 2 0- none1 = APR Module2 = APA Module3 = ADA Module4 = CTA Module5 = CTU Module

0

B-Channel 2


06 Terminal Type 0 = Not set1 = -- Not used --2 = -- Not used --3 = -- Not used --4 = -- Not used --5 = -- Not used --6 = PGD (Paging)7 = PGD (Tone Ringer)8 = PGD (Door Box)9 = PGD (ACI)10 = -- Not used --11 = -- Not used --12 = APR

0

07 Logical Port Number 0 = Not set 6 = PGD (Paging)7 = PGD (for Tone Ringer) 1-4 or 1-88 = PGD (for Door Box) 1-4 or 1-89 = PGD (for ACI) 1-8 or 1-9612:APR (for B2 mode) 19-50 or 193-512

0

Networking ◆ 111


For SLIU Unit

For COIU Unit

For DIOPU Unit

For TLIU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-16


01 Logical Port Number Through Software 3.07: 0-256From Software 4.0E+: 0-384

0

02 Not used

03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)



01 Logical Port Number 0-200 0



01 LD/OPX assignment 0 = LD Trunk1 = OPX Trunk

0

02 Logical Port Number 0 = For LD Trunk 0-2001 = For OPX Through Software 3.07:

0-256 From Software 4.0E+:

0-384

0




02 2/4Wire 0 = 2Wire1 = 4Wire

1

112 ◆ Networking


For BRIU Unit



01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not set1 = T-Bus2 = S-Bus

Options 3-5 determines the clock source for the networked connection.

3 = Network Mode (Leased Line)Telco sends the clock to the Master SystemTelco sends the clock to the Slave System

4 = Network Mode (Interconnected Line)Master System sends the clock to the Telco (or direct connection without telco) which then sends the clock to the Slave System

5 = Network Mode (Interconnected Line, Fixed layer 1=NT)Master System sends the clock to the TelcoSlave System sends the clock to the Telco

6 = S-Point (Leased Line)

1

02 Logical Port Number(see Note 1)

0 = Net set1 = For T-Bus (1-200)

2 = For S-Bus (Through Software 3.07: 0-256 From Software 4.0E+: 0-384)

0

03 Connection Type 0 = Point-to-Multipoint (not available for Networking)1 = Point-to-Point

0

04 Layer 3 Timer Type (see Note 2) 1-5 1

05 CLIP Information AnnouncementBased on this setting, the system will include a �Presentation Allowed� (1) or �Presentation Restricted� (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to a �1� if this option is enabled.


1

06 Connection Bus Mode (S-point only) 0 = Extended Passive Bus1 = Short Passive Bus

0

07 S-point DID digits 0-4 0

08 Dial sending Mode 0 = Enblock sending1 = Overlap sending

1

09 Dial Information Element(Only for Overlap Sending Mode)

0 = Keypad Facility1 = Called Party Number

0

10 Master/Slave System (NW mode only) 0 = Slave System1 = Master System

0

Networking ◆ 113


Note 1. The start port number of a BRI line is displayed. Two logic ports are automatically assigned to a BRI line.

Note 2. Each timer value of Layer3 are set up for every type of Program 81-06 (T-Bus) and Pro-gram 82-06 (S-Bus).

11 Networking System Number (NW mode only)

0-50 0

12 - Not Currently Used - 0

13 - Not Currently Used - 0

14 Service Protocol for S-Point 0 = Keypad Facility1 = SpeciÞed Protocol for Aspire System

0

15 Alert Tone When S-Bus Terminal Calls Busy ExtensionThis option determines for S-Bus ter-minals what a user on an S-Bus termi-nal will hear when a busy extension is called. If this option is set to "0", the user will hear an alert tone. If this option is set to "1", the user will be disconnected.

0 = Alert Tone1 = Disconnected

0

17 Ringback Tone to Telco Now Possi-ble with BRI TrunksThis option can be used to determine whether or not the system sends ring-back tone to the telco.

0 = Disable 1 = Enable

0

18 Type of NumberUse this option to deÞne the ISDN numbering plan to allow the calling party information to be passed to some telcos. Note that with software 4.08-4.0W, Program 99-01-32 was used instead.

0 = Unknown1 = International number2 = National number3 = Network SpeciÞc number4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number

3

19 Numbering Plan IdentiÞcationpassed to some telcos. Note that with software 4.08-4.0W, Program 99-01-33 was used instead.

0 = Unknown1 = ISDN numbering plan2 = Data numbering plan3 = Telex numbering plan4 = National standard numbering plan5 = Private numbering plan

1

114 ◆ Networking


For PRIU Unit


01 ISDN Line Mode 0 = Not set1 = T-Bus2 = S-Bus3 = Network Mode (Leased Line)4 = Network Mode (Interconnected Line)5 = Network Mode (Interconnected Line, Fixed Layer 1=NT)6 = S-Point (Leased Line)

1

02 Logical Port Number(see Note 1)

1 = for T-Bus 1-2002 = for S-Bus Through Software 3.07: 1-256

From Software 4.0E+: 1-384

0

03 CRC Multi-frame(CRC4)(Only E1[30B+D] Mode)

0 = off1 = on

0

04 Layer 3 Timer Type (see Note 2) 1-5 1

05 CLIP InformationBased on this setting, the system will include a �Presentation Allowed� (1) or �Presentation Restricted� (0) in the Setup message to allow or deny the Calling Party Number. Program 15-01-04 must also be set to a �1� if this option is enabled.


1

06 Length of cable 0 = 0 40m1 = 40 81m2 = 81 122m3 = 122 162m4 = 162 200m

0

07 S-Point DID Digits 0-4 0

08 Dial Sending Mode 0 = Enblock Sending1 = Overlap Sending

0

09 Dial Information Element(Only for Overlap Sending Mode)

0 = Keypad Facility1 = Called Party Number

0

10 Master/Slave System (Network Mode only)

0 = Slave System1 = Master System

0

11 Networking System Number (Network Mode only)

0-50 0

12 Short / Long-haul 0 = short-haul1 = long-haul

0

Networking ◆ 115


Note 1. The start port number of a PRI line is displayed. Thirty logic ports are automatically assigned to a PRI line.

Note 2. Each timer value of Layer3 is set up for each type in Program 81-06 (T-Bus) and Pro-gram 82-06 (S-Bus).

13 Loss-Of-Signal detection limit In short-haul mode In long-haul mode 0 = 0.91V 0 = 1.70V 1 = 0.74V 1 = 0.84V 2 = 0.59V 2 = 0.84V 3 = 0.42V 3 = 0.45V 4 = 0.32V 4 = 0.45V 5 = 0.21V 5 = 0.20V 6 = 0.16V 6 = 0.10V 7 = 0.10V 7 = not deÞned

0

14 Service Protocol for S-Point 0 = Keypad Facility1 = SpeciÞed Protocol for Aspire System

0

15 Alert Tone When S-Bus Terminal Calls Busy ExtensionThis option determines for S-Bus ter-minals what a user on an S-Bus ter-minal will hear when a busy extension is called. If this option is set to "0", the user will hear an alert tone. If this option is set to "1", the user will be disconnected.

0 = Alert Tone1 = Disconnected

0

16 ISDN 2 B-Channel TransferEnable or disable the 2 B-Channel Transfer function for a PRI PCB.

0 = Off/Disable1 = On/Enable

0

18 Type of NumberUse this option to deÞne the ISDN numbering plan to allow the calling party information to be passed to some telcos. Note that with soft-ware 4.08-4.0W, Program 99-01-32 was used instead.

0 = Unknown1 = International number2 = National number3 = Network SpeciÞc number4 = Subscriber number 5 = Abbreviated number

3

19 Numbering Plan IdentiÞcationpassed to some telcos. Note that with software 4.08-4.0W, Program 99-01-33 was used instead.

0 = Unknown1 = ISDN numbering plan2 = Data numbering plan3 = Telex numbering plan4 = National standard numbering plan5 = Private numbering plan

1


116 ◆ Networking


For T1 Unit

For VMSU Unit

For VOIPU Unit




02 Frame Type Setup 0 = D4 (12 Multi Frame)1 = ESF (24 Multi Frame)

0

03 Zero Code Suppression Setup ZCS_B8ZS

0 = B8ZS1 = AMI/ZCS

0

04 DTI<->CSU Distance Setup 0= 0 feet � 133 feet1= 133 feet � 266 feet2= 266 feet � 399 feet3= 399 feet � 533 feet4= 533 feet � 655 feet

0

05 T1 Clock Source Master/Slave 0 = Internal1 = External

1Prior to 2.65 = 0


01 Logical Port Number Through Software 3.07: 0-256From Software 4.0E+: 0-384

0



01 Trunk Logical Port Number 0-200 0

02 H.323 or SIP TrunkDetermine the IP trunk type setup. If SIP trunking is used, this reduces the number of ports on the VOIPU card which can be used for Aspire IP phones or IP network-ing. With SIP trunking, some ports must be deÞned for SIP.Contact Your NEC Sales Representative for information on the SIP feature availability.

0 = H.3231 = SIP

0

Networking ◆ 117


Conditions(A.) When changing a deÞned terminal type, Þrst set the type to �0� and then plug the new device in

to have the system automatically deÞne it or redeÞne the type manually.(B.) The system must have a PCB installed in order to view/change the options for that type of

PCB.

Feature Cross ReferenceNone

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-03 (PCB Setup):


2. 10 03

3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.

4. Select a slot number to be programmed by pressing the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys. Or, press FLASH once to select the slot number or press FLASH twice to select a port num-ber. Enter the slot or port number.

5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.

6. Enter data for the next item in the program.OR

Press MSG once to enter a new item number.OR

Press MSG until you�ve exited that series�s programming section.

10-02-01 Slot No 1ESIport01 CH1 1 :TEL |1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-02-nn Slot No 1nnnnn back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

118 ◆ Networking

Programming10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup

10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup

DescriptionUse Program 10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default Gateway addresses.

Input Data


SA � Available. � Available.

� Applicable to IP Networking. � Applicable to IP Networking.

Item No. Item Input Data Default Conditions

01 IP Address 1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1 -191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254

172.16.0.10

02 Subnet Mask

128.0.0.0240.0.0.0254.0.0.0255.192.0.0255.252.0.0255.255.128.0255.255.248.0255.255.255.0255.255.255.224255.255.255.252

192.0.0.0248.0.0.0255.0.0.0255.224.0.0255.254.0.0255.255.192.0255.255.252.0255.255.255.128255.255.255.240255.255.255.254

224.0.0.0252.0.0.0255.128.0.0255.248.0.0255.255.0.0255.255.224.0255.255.254.0255.255.255.192255.255.255.248255.255.255.255

255.255.0.0 The setting of Sub-net-Mask is mistaken when all Host Address are 0.

If the network section is:0,127128.0191.255192.0.0223.255.255The setting of Sub-net-Mask is mistaken.

03 Default Gateway

1.0.0.1 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1 ~ 191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 ~ 223.255.254.254

0.0.0.0 IP Address for Router

04 Time Zone -12 thru +12 Hours +9 Hours Enter the difference for standard time.

05 NIC 0 = Auto Detect1 = 100Mbps, Full Duplex2 = 100Mbps, Half Duplex3 = 10Mbps, Full Duplex4 = 10Mbps, Half Duplex

0 NIC Auto Negotiate

Networking ◆ 119


ConditionsThe system must be reset in order for these changes to take affect.

Feature Cross Reference● VoIP

06 NAPT Router SetupEnable or disable the NAPT Router Setup. With SIP trunking behind a NAPT router, this must be set to enabled.

0=Disable, 1=Enable 0

07 NAPT Router IP AddressSet the NAPT Router IP Address. With SIP trunking, the IP address of the WAN side of the router must be entered.

0.0.0.1 - 126.255.255.254128.0.0.1 - 191.255.255.254192.0.0.1 - 223.225.225.254

0.0.0.0

08 ICMP Redirect

0=Enable, 1=Disable 0

120 ◆ Networking



To enter data for Program 10-12 (NTCPU Network Setup):


2. 10 12






10-12-01IP_Add 172.16 .0 .10 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-12-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 121

Programming10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment

10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment

DescriptionUse Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to deÞne the TCP port/address/etc. for communicating to external equipment.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





Type of external equipment 1 = CTI Server2 = ACD MIS3 = - Reserve -4 = Network Listener5 = SMDR6 = DIM Access


01 TCP PortWhen using External Device 6 for DIM access, the port can-not be set to 5963.

0-65535 External Device 1 = 0External Device 2 = 0External Device 3 = 0

External Device 4 = 30,000External Device 5 = 0External Device 6 = 0

02 Not used

03 Keep Alive Time 1-255 (Seconds) 30

122 ◆ Networking

Programming10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment


To enter data for Program 10-20 (LAN Setup for External Equipment):


2. 10 20


4. Select the device number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or

VOLUME ▼ keys.





10-20-01 Ex-Device1TCP_Port 0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-20-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 123

Programming10-27 : IP System ID

10-27 : IP System ID

DescriptionUse Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the networked IP systems.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





System ID 01-50


Program

01 IP AddressSystem ID is related with the System ID in the Numbering Plan (Pro-gram 11-01-03). When the digits are analyzed and the system ID is determined from the system data set in the Numbering Plan, the Networking call will be sent to the IP Address set in this program.

The IP Address should be the IP Address of the peer NTCPU (Program 10-12-01).

1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254

0.0.0.0 11-01-0110-12-01

02 Call Procedure PortThe Port Number should be set with the same value as the H.225 setup port in Program 84-02-33.

1-65535 1730 84-02-33

124 ◆ Networking

Programming10-27 : IP System ID


To enter data for Program 10-27 (IP System ID):


2. 10 27


4. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





10-27-01 SysID1IP Add 0 .0 .0 .0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-27-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 125

Programming10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup

10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup

DescriptionUse Program 10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup to set the interval and retry count of the Aspire Networking keep alive message. The keep alive is used for ISDN and IP networking.

The keep alive message is automatically responded to by the destination Aspire, if the response is not received the retry count will start. If a response is not received within the number of retries the networking link will be taken out of service. When the link is taken out of service:

● Any calls that are in progress will be released.

● Park Hold orbits will be released.

● No further Park Hold information will be sent until the link is active.

The link will automatically become active when the next keep alive response is received.

Input Data

ConditionsThe keep alive message must be sent and a response not received for the retry count, for the link to be taken out of service and the calls in progress and Park Hold orbits to be released.

For example: If an ISDN Aspire Networking link is disconnected at Layer 1 then the keep alive message can not be sent, therefore the keep alive operation will not occur.

Feature Cross ReferenceNetworking


IN � Available. � Available with software 1.11+.


Program

01 Keep Alive IntervalThis program is used to set the inter-val of Keep Alive. The system does not send Keep alive when this item is set to "0".If this entry is greater than �0�, net-worked PRI spans which are using Kentrox DSUs will not re-sync when removed from service then returned to service.

0-65535 seconds 0

02 Keep Alive Retry TimerSet how many times the system resends Keep Alive.

1-255 5

126 ◆ Networking

Programming10-31 : Networking Keep Alive Setup


To enter data for Program 10-31 (Networking Keep Alive Setup):


2. 10 31






10-31-01Interval 0 Sec. back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-31-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 127

Programming10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation

10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation

DescriptionUse Program 10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation to assign the number of B-channels to be used for each ISDN PCB. This allows for fractional PRIs when used with multiple site net-working. If this program is limited to less than "23" on one side of the network, then it also limits both inbound and outbound network calls. For example, when you select 10 channels then only channels 1 to 10 will be available. If a call is attempted on channels 11 to 30 the caller will receive busy tone. This also applies on the other side of the network as well.

The setting is for each slot within the Aspire system; ensure that you select the correct slot before making any changes.

This program will not affect a PRI card set as Trunk or Station mode.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross ReferenceNetworking


IN � Not Available. � Available with software 2.09+.

Slot Number 1 - 16


Program

01 Maximum Channels 1 - 23 Slots 1-16 = 23

128 ◆ Networking

Programming10-32 : PRI Networking Channel Limitation


To enter data for Program 10-32 (PRI Networking Channel Limitation):


2. 10 32






10-32-01 Slot No 1Max Chan. 23 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

10-32-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 129

Programming11-01 : System Numbering

11-01 : System Numbering

DescriptionUse Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system�s internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the Þrst and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

1. Enter the digits you want to change.

2. Specify the length of the code you select to change.

3. Assign a function to the code selected.

Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the System Numbering (page 133) table, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes.

● Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For exam-ple, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected would be 600-699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected would be 6000-6999.)

● Entering two digits lets you deÞne codes based on the Þrst two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to deÞne the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only * and # use two-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undeÞned.



� Applicable to IP and ISDN Networking. � Applicable to IP and ISDN Networking.

CAUTION Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the chart for System Numbering (page 133) to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.

Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Program or Program 90-03 to make a backup copy of your system�s data.

130 ◆ Networking


Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits com-prise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the System Numbering (page 133) table. In the default program, all codes from 100-999 are three digits long. Codes beginning with 0 are one digit long. Codes beginning with * are 3 digits long and codes begin-ning with # are 4 digits long.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial Type column in the System Numbering (page 133) table. The choices are:

Dial Types Dial Type Description Related Program

0 - Not Used -

1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Registration)11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel/Motel)11-15 : Service Code Setup (Special access)

2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbers11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbers11-06 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Extension Numbers11-07 : Department Calling Group Numbers11-08 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Group Pilot Numbers

3 Trunk Access Code 11-09 : Trunk Access Code

4 Special Trunk Access 11-09 : Trunk Access Code

5 Operator Access 20-17 : Operator�s Extension

6 ARS/F-Route Access 44-xx

8 Networking 10-03 : PCB Setup10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment10-27 : IP System IP

Networking ◆ 131


● Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your sys-tem operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should: - Change the Dial Type for the digit 1 from 1 (Service Code) to 2 (extension number). - Change the Dial Type for the digit 7 from 2 (extension number) to 1 (Service Code). - In Program 11-02, reassign extension numbers on each ßoor from 100 to 399. - In Programs 11-10 through 11-15, reassign the Service Codes from the 100 series (e.g.,

116) to the 700 series (e.g., 716). (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 11-10 through 11-15.)

- Check Program 11-16 to be sure that the Single Digit Service Code 04 (digit 7) does not affect any post dial Service Codes codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-15. (Unless you changed codes from their default assignments, this would not be the case.)

- In Program 45-01-03, enter �0� to disable Voice Mail Call Screening. If you left screen-ing enabled, Voice Mail ports could call the wrong extensions. For example, a Voice Mail port trying to call screen extension 130 would outdial 1130. This would call exten-sion 113 instead.

Extension numbers now will correspond to room numbers, and all the Service Codes in the 100 series will be in the 700 series.

DefaultSee the following tables.

132 ◆ Networking


System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access, 4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,

8=Networking, 0=Not Used

Dialed Number

Number of Digits RequiredDefault New

Dial TypeDefault New

Network System ID [if type 8] -

0-50

1X 3 1

11 0 0

12 0 0

13 0 0

14 0 0

15 0 0

16 0 0

17 0 0

18 0 0

19 0 0

10 0 0

1* 0 0

1# 0 0

2X 3 2

21 0 0

22 0 0

23 0 0

24 0 0

25 0 0

26 0 0

27 0 0

28 0 0

29 0 0

20 0 0

2* 0 0

2# 0 0

Networking ◆ 133


System Numbering



Dialed Number




0-50

3X 3 2

31 0 0

32 0 0

33 0 0

34 0 0

35 0 0

36 0 0

37 0 0

38 0 0

39 0 0

30 0 0

3* 0 0

3# 0 0

4X 3 2

41 0 0

42 0 0

43 0 0

44 0 0

45 0 0

46 0 0

47 0 0

48 0 0

49 0 0

40 0 0

4* 0 0

4# 0 0

134 ◆ Networking


System Numbering



Dialed Number




0-50

5X 3 2

51 0 0

52 0 0

53 0 0

54 0 0

55 0 0

56 0 0

57 0 0

58 0 0

59 0 0

50 0 0

5* 0 0

5# 0 0

6X 3 2

61 0 0

62 0 0

63 0 0

64 0 0

65 0 0

66 0 0

67 0 0

68 0 0

69 0 0

60 0 0

6* 0 0

6# 0 0

Networking ◆ 135


System Numbering



Dialed Number




0-50

7X 3 2

71 0 0

72 0 0

73 0 0

74 0 0

75 0 0

76 0 0

77 0 0

78 0 0

79 0 0

70 0 0

7* 0 0

7# 0 0

8X 3 1

81 0 0

82 0 0

83 0 0

84 0 0

85 0 0

86 0 0

87 0 0

88 0 0

89 0 0

80 0 0

8* 0 0

8# 0 0

136 ◆ Networking


System Numbering



Dialed Number




0-50

9X 1 3

91 0 0

92 0 0

93 0 0

94 0 0

95 0 0

96 0 0

97 0 0

98 0 0

99 0 0

90 0 0

9* 0 0

9# 0 0

0X 1 5

01 0 0

02 0 0

03 0 0

04 0 0

05 0 0

06 0 0

07 0 0

08 0 0

09 0 0

00 0 0

0* 0 0

0# 0 0

Networking ◆ 137


System Numbering



Dialed Number




0-50

*X 2 1

*1 0 0

*2 0 0

*3 0 0

*4 0 0

*5 0 0

*6 0 0

*7 0 0

*8 0 0

*9 0 0

*0 0 0

** 0 0

*# 0 0

#X 0 0

#1 2 1

#2 2 1

#3 2 1

#4 2 1

#5 2 1

#6 2 1

#7 2 1

#8 2 1

#9 2 1

#0 2 1

#* 4 1

## 2 1

138 ◆ Networking


ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Flexible System Numbering


To enter data for Program 11-01 (System Numbering):


2. 11 01


4. Select the dial number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or

VOLUME ▼ keys.





11-01-01 Dial 11x Digit 3 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-01-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 139

Programming11-02 : Extension Numbering

11-02 : Extension Numbering

DescriptionUse Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number can be up to eight digits long. The Þrst/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Pro-gram 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number.

Input Data

Default

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Department Calling

● Flexible System Numbering

● Intercom




Extension Port Number 001-512

Item No. Extension Number Description

01 Dial (Up to 8 digits) � Set up extension numbers for Key Telephones, Single Line Telephones (Including 1SLIA, APR), and IP Telephones.

� Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated,

Extension Port Number Extension Number

1 301

2 302

3 303

: :

199 499

200 5000

: :

512 5312

140 ◆ Networking

Programming11-02 : Extension Numbering


To enter data for Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering):


2. 11 02


4. Select the extension port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





11-02-01 Extn Port1Extension_No. 301 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-02-nn Extn Portnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 141

Programming11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers

11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers

DescriptionUse Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each Depart-ment Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can be up to eight digits long. The Þrst/second digit(s) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 as type 2.

Input Data

DefaultGroup Numbers 1-8 or 01-64: No setting

ConditionsNone


● Department Step Calling




Department (Extension) Group Number Aspire S: 1-8Aspire: 01-64

Item No.

Department (Extension) Group Pilot

Number

Description Related Program

01 Dial(Up to 8 digits)

Use this program to assign department group pilot numbers.The number set up by Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering) cannot be used.The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06 and 11-08.

� 16-01 : Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup

� 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

� 16-03 : Secondary Department Group

142 ◆ Networking

Programming11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers


To enter data for Program 11-07 (Department Group Pilot Numbers):


2. 11 07


4. Select the telephone group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-UME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





11-07-01 TEL Group1Pilot_Call_No. back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-07-nn TEL Groupnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 143

Programming11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

DescriptionUse Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11 through 11-16. The following chart shows:

● The number of each code (01-27)

● The function of the Service Code.

● What type of telephones can use the Service Code

● The code�s default entry. For example, dialing *3 (item 26) allows users to force a trunk line to disconnect.

● Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the �New� column.

Input Data



� Applicable to IP and ISDN Networking.

� Aspire Wireless service code items 30 and 31 are not available.

� Service Codes 32-34 available with soft-ware 4.93+.

� Applicable to IP and ISDN Networking.

� Aspire Wireless service code items 30 and 31 are available with software 2.63+.

� Service Codes 32-34 available with soft-ware 4.93+.

Item No. Item Terminals Default New Related

Program

01 Day / Night Mode Switching KTS, SLT 818 12-xx20-07-01

02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone KTS 881 10-04

03 Setting the System Time KTS 828

04 Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing Numbers KTS 853

05 Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbers KTS 854

06 Setting the Automatic Forwarding for Each Trunk Line

KTS 833 24-04-01

07 Canceling the Automatic Forwarding for Each Trunk Line

KTS 834 24-04-01

08 Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Forwarding KTS 835 24-04-01

09 Not Used No Setting

10 Not Used - - - -

144 ◆ Networking


11 Entry of Credit for Toll Restriction - Not Used No Setting

12 Night Mode Switching for Other Group KTS 118 12-xx20-07-01

13 Not Used - - - -

14 Not Used - - - -

15 Not Used - - - -

16 Leaving Message Waiting KTS 126 11-11-09

17 Dial Block by Supervisor KTS 101 90-19

18 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box KTS 822 13-05

19 Not Used - - -

20 VRS - Record/Erase Message KTS 116 20-07-13

21 VRS - General Message Playback KTS 111 20-07-14

22 VRS - Record or Erase General Message KTS 112 20-07-15

23 SMDR - Extension Accumulated Printout Code KTS 121 20-07-18

24 SMDR - Group Accumulated Printout Code KTS 122 20-07-19

25 Account Code Accumulated Printout Code KTS 123 20-07-20

26 Forced Trunk Disconnect KTS, SLT *3 20-07-11

27 Trunk Port Disable for Outgoing Calls KTS 145 20-07-12

28 Not Used - - -

29 Not Used - - -

30 Register Aspire Wireless HandsetDeÞne the service code to be used to register an Aspire Wireless handset.

KTS - 20-07-21

31 Unregister Aspire Wireless HandsetDeÞne the service code to be used to unregister an Aspire Wireless handset.

KTS - 20-07-21

32 Set Private Call RefuseDeÞne the service code to be used to set the �Private� call refusal for the trunks which are programmed in Program 14-01-27 to 1.

KTS, SLT No Setting 14-01-27

33 Enter Caller ID RefuseFor keysets only, deÞne the service code to be used to add or delete the Caller ID numbers to be refused.

KTS, SLT No Setting 14-01-27


Program

Networking ◆ 145


ConditionsNone

Feature Cross ReferenceRefer to chart above.


To enter data for Program 11-10 (Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)):


2. 11 10






34 Set Caller ID RefuseDeÞne the service code to be used to enable/disable the Caller ID call refusal for the trunks which are pro-grammed in Program 14-01-27 to 1.

No Setting 14-01-27

35 DID Mode SwitchingAssign the service code to be used to manually change the time pattern for a DID number.

KST, SLT No Setting

11-10-01NT-Mode_Switch *01 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-10-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→


Program

146 ◆ Networking

Programming11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

DescriptionUse Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in Pro-grams 11-10, and 11-12 through 11-16. The following chart shows: ● The number of each code (01-38) ● The function of the Service Code.● What type of telephones can use the Service Code● The code�s default entry. For example, dialing 825 (item 18) allows users to turn on or turn off

Background Music. ● Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.


Input Data




� Item 43 available. � Item 43 available with software 1.20+.


Program

01 Call Forward - Immediate KTS, SLT No Setting

02 Call Forward - Busy KTS, SLT No Setting

03 Call Forward - No Answer KTS, SLT No Setting

04 Call Forward - Busy/No Answer KTS, SLT No Setting

05 Call Forward - Both Ring KTS, SLT No Setting

06 Call Forwarding - Select Option KTS, SLT *2

07 Call Forwarding - Follow-Me KTS, SLT No Setting

08 Do Not Disturb KTS, SLT 847

09 Answer Message Waiting KTS, SLT *0 11-10-16

10 Cancel All Messages Waiting KTS, SLT 873

11 Cancel Message Waiting KTS, SLT 871

12 Alarm Clock KTS, SLT 827 20-01-06

13 Display Language Selection for Keyset KTS 178 15-02

14 Text Message Setting KTS No Setting

15 Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls KTS 821 20-09-0520-02-12

Networking ◆ 147


16 Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls KTS 823 20-09-0520-02-12

17 Programmable Function Key Programming (Dialing 851 Service Code)

KTS 851 15-0711-11-38

18 BGM On/Off KTS 825

19 Key Touch Tone On/Off KTS 824

20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones KTS 820 15-02

21 Check Incoming Ring Tones KTS 811

22 Extension Name Programming KTS 800 15-01

23 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL KTS 179

24 Change Extension Class of ServiceAllows an extension user to change the COS of another extension. Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28.

KTS 177 20-13-28

25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Department Group KTS, SLT 102 20-11-1724-05

26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Department Group

KTS, SLT 103

27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Department Group

KTS 104 20-11-1724-05

28 Delayed Transfer for Every Department Group KTS, SLT 105 20-11-1724-05

24-02-08

29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Department Group

KTS, SLT 106 20-11-17

30 DND Setup for Each Department Group KTS, SLT 107

31 DND Cancellation for Each Department Group KTS, SLT 108

32 Not Used - - - -

33 Dial Block KTS, SLT 100

34 Temporary Toll Restriction Override KTS, SLT 875 21-07

35 Pilot Group Withdrawing KTS, SLT 150

36 Toll Restriction Override KTS, SLT 163 21-14

37 Adjusting Ring Volume KTS 829

38 Programmable Function Key Programming (Dialing 852 Service Code)

KTS 852 15-0711-11-17


Program

148 ◆ Networking


ConditionsNone


39 One Touch Dial Number Entry KTS 855

40 Off-Premise Call Forwarding KTS, SLT *4

41 Tandem Ringing KTS, SLT No Setting 15-0730-03

42 Aspire Wireless Transferring When Out of RangeCustomize the service code to be used when setting a Aspire Wireless phone to transfer calls when out of range.

Aspire Wireless

189

43 Headset Mode SwitchingThis option determines how long after the hookswitch is released the SLT will hear dial tone before the phone goes into headset mode.

SLT 188

44 Automated Attendant (DSPDB) - Not Used in U.S. -

- - - -

56 Telephone Book Lock ServiceUsing the service code deÞned in this option, users can change the system Telephone Book lock status.

KTS No Setting


Program

Networking ◆ 149



To enter data for Program 11-11 (Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)):


2. 11 11






11-11-01Call_Forward-Imm901 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-11-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

150 ◆ Networking

Programming11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

DescriptionUse Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10, 11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16. The following chart shows:




● The code�s default entry. For example, dialing 805 (code 05) will cancel a previously set Camp-On.

● Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.


For �8xx� service codes used after dialing an extension (post-dialing), Program 11-16-09 (Single Digit Voice Mail code) must be deleted or changed from the default entry of �8� for the service codes to work.

Input Data




� Item 58 available. � Item 58 available with software 1.11+.


Program

01 Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb OverrideActivating Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override. This code is only available if you disable the voice mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.

KTS, SLT 807 11-16-09

02 Conference KTS, SLT #1

03 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) KTS, SLT 809

04 Set Camp-On KTS, SLT 850

05 Cancel Camp-On KTS, SLT 870

06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal CallUsed to toggle an ICM call between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgo-ing Intercom calls.

KTS, SLT 812

07 Step Call KTS, SLT 808

08 Barge-In KTS, SLT 810

09 Change to STG All Ring KTS, SLT No Setting 16-02

Networking ◆ 151


10 Common/Extension Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT #2

11 Group Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT #4

12 Last Number Dial KTS, SLT #5

13 Saved Number Dial KTS, SLT 815

14 Trunk Group Access KTS, SLT 804

15 SpeciÞed Trunk Access KTS, SLT #9

16 Trunk Access Via Networking KTS No Setting

17 Clear Last Number Dialing Data KTS, SLT 876

18 Clear Saved Number Dialing Data KTS, SLT 885

19 Internal Group Paging KTS, SLT 801 31-01-01

20 External Paging KTS, SLT 803

21 Meet Me Answer to SpeciÞed Internal Paging Group KTS, SLT 864

22 Meet Me Answer to External Paging KTS, SLT 865

23 Meet Me Answer in Same Paging Group KTS, SLT 863

24 Combined Paging KTS, SLT *1 31-07

25 Direct Call Pickup - Own Group KTS, SLT 856

26 Call Pickup for SpeciÞed Group KTS, SLT 868

27 Call Pickup KTS, SLT *#

28 Call Pickup for Another Group KTS, SLT 869

29 Direct Extension Call Pickup KTS, SLT **

30 SpeciÞed Trunk Answer KTS, SLT 172

31 Park KTS, SLT #6 24-03

32 Answer for Park KTS, SLT *6 24-03

33 Group Hold KTS, SLT 832

34 Answer for Group Hold KTS, SLT 862

35 Personal (Extension) Park KTS, SLT 857

36 Door Box Access KTS, SLT 802

37 Common Canceling Service Code KTS, SLT 120

38 Not Used - 883 - -


Program

152 ◆ Networking


ConditionsFor �8xx� service codes used after dialing an extension (post-dialing), Program 11-16-09 (Single Digit Voice Mail code) must be deleted or changed from the default entry of �8� for the service codes to work.

39 VRS Access- Not Used in U.S. -

KTS, SLT 884

40 Personal Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT #7

41 Voice Over KTS 890 11-16-08

42 Flash on Trunk lines SLT #3

43 Universal Answer SLT #0 14-0514-06

44 Callback Test for SLT SLT 899

45 Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 849 15-03-07

46 Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 859 15-03-08

47 Call Waiting Answer / Split AnswerSplitting (switching) between calls

KST/SLT 894 11-12-03

48 Account Code SLT ##

49 Not Used - - - -

50 General Purpose Relay KST 880

51 Call Own Mailbox *8

52 Live Monitoring (VRS) No Setting

53 Live Recording at SLT SLT 154

54 VRS Routing for ANI/DNISUse when setting up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Automated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.

882

56 E911 Alarm Shut OffEnter the Service Code that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.

886 - 20-08-1621-01-13

57 Unsupervised Conference/Tandem Trunking KST/SLT #8

58 Transfer Into ConferenceAssign the Service Code users dial to Transfer a call into a Conference call.

KST/SLT 124 20-13-1020-13-1520-13-16


Program

Networking ◆ 153




To enter data for Program 11-12 (Service Code Setup (for Service Access)):


2. 11 12






11-12-01Bypass_Call 801 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-12-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

154 ◆ Networking

Programming11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

DescriptionUse Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-15. The following chart shows:




● The code�s default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension will switch the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it�s currently deÞned).

● Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.


Input Data

ConditionsNone




� Item 11 requires software 2.64+. � Item 11 requires software 2.64+.

Item No. Item Default New Related

Program

01 Step Call #

02 Barge In No Setting

03 Switching of Voice/Signal Call 1

04 Intercom Off Hook Signaling 7

05 Camp-On 2

06 DND/Call Forward Override No Setting

07 Message Waiting 0

08 Voice Over 6

09 Access to Voice Mail 8

10 STG All Ring Mode No Setting 16-01-05

11 Personal Park No Setting

Networking ◆ 155

Programming11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup



To enter data for Program 11-16 (Single Digit Service Code Setup):


2. 11 16






11-16-01Step Call back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

11-16-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

156 ◆ Networking

Programming14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

DescriptionUse Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data



� Item 24 available with software 2.63+.

� Item 25 available with software 4.0E+.




� Item 25 available with software 4.0E+.



Trunk Port Number Aspire S: 1-8Aspire: 001-200


Program

01 Trunk NameSet the names for trunks. The trunk name displays at display keysets for incoming and outgoing calls.

Up to 12 characters 1 = Line 001|

Line 200 = Line 200

02 Transmit CODEC Gain TypeUse this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the amount of gain (signal ampliÞcation) for the trunk you are programming.

1~63(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB in .5dB intervals)

32 (0dB)

03 Receive CODEC Gain TypeUse this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the amount of gain (signal ampliÞcation) for the trunk you are programming.


32 (0dB)

04 Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer CallsUse this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.


22 (-5dB)

05 Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer CallsUse this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.


22 (-5dB)

Networking ◆ 157


06 SMDR Print OutUse this option to have the system include/exclude the trunk you are pro-gramming from the SMDR printout. See Program 35-01 and 35-02 for SMDR printout options.

0 = No print out1 = Prints out

0

07 Outgoing CallsUse this option to allow/prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming.

0 = prevented1 = allowed

1

08 Toll RestrictionUse this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Toll Restriction program-ming (ex: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If dis-abled, the trunk is a toll free line.

0 = Restriction disable1 = Restriction enable

1 21-0421-0521-06

09 Private LineUse this option to enable/disable a trunk�s ability to be used as a Private Line.

0 = Private line disable1 = Private line enable

0

10 DTMF Tones for Outgoing CallsUse this option to enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.

0 = disable1 = enable

0

11 Account Code RequiredUse this option to enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes.


1

12 - Not Used - 1

13 Loop Disconnect SupervisionUse this option to enable (1) or disable (0) loop supervision for the trunk. This option is required for Call Forwarding Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking (including 2 B-Channel Transfer with PRI) only.


1

14 Long Conversation CutoffUse this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Cutoff feature for each trunk.


0 20-21-0320-21-04

15 Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut OffUse this option to enable or disable the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk.


0 20-21-0120-21-02


Program

158 ◆ Networking


16 Forced Release of Held CallUse this option to enable/disable forced release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a programmed interval (Pro-gram 24-01-05). If disabled, forced dis-connection does not occur. Program 24-01-01 also affects this option.


0 24-01-05

17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation AlarmUse this option to enable or disable the Warning Tone for Long Conversation fea-ture for DISA callers.


0

18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 0 = disable1 = enable

0

19 Privacy Mode Toggle OptionUse this option to enable or disable a trunk�s ability to be switched from private to non-private mode by pressing the line key or Privacy Release function key.


0

20 Block Outgoing Caller IDAllow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code *67 (deÞned in 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits.

0 = Allow1 = Block

0

21 Caller ID Block CodeEnter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to �1�.

Dial (up to 8 digits) *67

22 Caller ID to Voice MailEnable or disable the system�s ability to send the Caller ID digits (Remote Log-On Protocol) to voice mail.


0

23 LCR - Not Used in U.S. 0

24 Trunk-to-Trunk Outgoing Caller ID Through ModeEnable or disable the Trunk-to-Trunk Out-going Caller ID Through Mode. This option allows Caller ID from the original outside caller to be displayed when a trunk is forwarded off premise.This option can only be used with PRI and SIP trunks.


0


Program

Networking ◆ 159


Default

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross ReferenceRefer to features in above chart.

25 Continue/Disconnect Trunk-to-Trunk ConversationWhen Program 24-02-10 is set to discon-nect a trunk after the deÞned time, deter-mine whether or not a user should have the ability to use the continue/disconnect code.


0 24-02-10

26 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer ModeFor each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) the Step Transfer function when using the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer fea-ture. If this option is disabled, the call will be forwarded to the Þrst speciÞed destina-tion only.


0 24-04-01

27 Caller ID Refuse SetupThis program deÞnes if the system rejects a trunk call and plays a VRS message based on the Caller ID information received. This option is set on a per trunk basis.

0 = Does not reject the call1 = Rejects the call

0

Trunk Port Number Name

001 LINE 001

002 LINE 002

: :

200 LINE 200


Program

160 ◆ Networking



To enter data for Program 14-01 (Basic Trunk Data Setup):


2. 14 01


4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or

VOLUME ▼ keys.





14-01-01 Trunk1TRK Name = LINE 001 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

14-01-nn Trunknnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 161

Programming14-06 : Trunk Group Routing

14-06 : Trunk Group Routing

DescriptionUse Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) you specify. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the Þrst group are busy, the sys-tem may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may limit this option. The system contains 8 (Aspire S) or 100 (Aspire) routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four priority orders for trunk access.

Input Data


IN � Available - 8 Trunk Group Numbers. � Available - 100 Trunk Group Numbers.

Example for setting:

With less than 4 trunk groups,

Route number 1 : Order 1 � Trunk group 1

: Order 2 � Trunk group 2

For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 2.

With more than 4 trunk groups,




: Order 4 � 1002 (Jump to Route number 2)



For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk group 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system searches for an idle line in trunk group 4 and 5.

Route Table Number Aspire S: 1-8Aspire: 001-100

Item No. Priority Order Number Input Data Related Program

01 1-4 0 = not specify1-8 or 001-100 : (Trunk Group Number)101-150 : (100 + Network System Number)1001-1100 : (1000 + Route Table Number)

14-01-0714-0515-01-0221-02

162 ◆ Networking

Programming14-06 : Trunk Group Routing

DefaultRoute 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1), Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (not speciÞed)All Other Routes (2-100) and Order Numbers (1-4) = 0 (not speciÞed)

Conditions None



To enter data for Program 14-06 (Trunk Group Routing):


2. 14 06


4. Select the Trunk Group Routing Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





14-06-01 Route TBL1Order1 Data1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

14-06-nn Route TBLnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 163

Programming15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

DescriptionUse Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up the extensions used for Fax Networking.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Single Line Telephone, Analog

● Single Line Telephone, Digital



Extension Number Max. 8 digits


Program

03 Terminal TypeEnter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup (required for Fax Networking). Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup.

For Voice Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).

0 = Normal1 = Special

0

164 ◆ Networking

Programming15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup


To enter data for Program 15-03 (Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup):


2. 15 03


4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲

or VOLUME ▼ keys.





15-03-01 TEL301SLT Type 0:DP back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

15-03-nn TELnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 165

Programming16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup

DescriptionUse Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each department group.

Input Data


IN � Available - 8 Department Groups. � Available - 64 Department Groups.


Department Group Number Aspire S: 1-8Aspire: 01-64


Program

01 Department Name Max. 12 characters No setting 11-07

02 Department Calling CycleUse this option to set the call routing for Department Calling. Routing can be either circular (cycles to all phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest priority extensions Þrst).

0 = Priority Routing1 = Circular Routing

0 16-02

03 Department Routing When BusyUse this option to set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the Þrst available department number. This only occurs for calls to the extension directly, not the department number assigned in Program 11-07.

0 = Normal (Intercom caller to busy department member hears busy)

1 = Circular (Intercom callers to busy department member routes to idle member)

0 16-02

04 Hunting ModeUse this option to set the action taken when a call reaches the last extension in the Department Group (0=hunting stopped, 1 =hunting repeats with circu-lar routing through the Department Group.

0 = Last extension is called and hunting is stopped.

1 = Circular

0

166 ◆ Networking


ConditionsNone


05 Department Group All Ring Mode OperationDetermine whether calls ringing a Department Group should ring all extensions in the group simultaneously automatically or manually when using the service code deÞned in Program 11-12-09.

0 = Manual1 = Automatic

0 11-16-10

06 STG Withdraw Mode- Not Used -

0 = Disable (Camp On)1 = Enable (Overßow Mode)

0

07 Call Recall Restriction for STGDetermine whether a or not an unan-swered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred.

0 = Disable (Recall)1 = Enable (No Recall)

0

08 Queuing for Department Group CallTo have Department Group calls queue when busy, set this entry to �1� for an extension or voice mail group.

0 = No Queuing1 = Queuing

(This program allows entries of 1-32, however, the system accepts any entry other than �0� as to allow queuing.)

0

09 Department Hunting No Answer TimeSet how long a call will ring a Depart-ment group extension before hunting occurs.

0-64800 seconds 15

10 Hunt TypeSet the type of hunting for each Exten-sion (Department) Group:

0 = No queuing1 = Hunting When Busy2 = Hunting When Not Answered3 = Hunting When Busy or No Answer

0


Program

Networking ◆ 167



To enter data for Program 16-01 (Department Group Basic Data Setup):


2. 16 01


4. Select the Department Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-UME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





16-01-01 TEL Group1Dept.Name = back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

16-01-nn TEL Groupnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

168 ◆ Networking

Programming16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

DescriptionUse Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to assign each extension to a Department Group and to assign the extension�s priority in the group. When a call comes into the group, it may ring the extensions in order of their priority. The system uses these groups for Depart-ment Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department Groups in Program 11-07. This lets system users place calls to the departments.

For voice mail, assign the voice mail ports to the same group. With IntraMail, these ports are deÞned in Program 47-01-17.

Input Data

Note: The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02 and 11-04. (Extension ports are 1-50 [Aspire S] or 1 to 256 [Aspire]. Virtual extension ports are 1-24 [Aspire S] or 1-256 [Aspire].)

ConditionsNone



IN � Available - 8 Department Groups. � Available - 64 Department Groups.


Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item No. Group Number Priority Default Description Related

Program

01 Aspire S: 1-8

Aspire: 1-64

1-999 1 � xxx(See Note

Below)

Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called.Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-02.

11-0716-01

Networking ◆ 169

Programming16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions


To enter data for Program 16-02 (Department Group Assignment for Extensions):


2. 16 02



or VOLUME ▼ keys.





16-02-01 TEL301Extension Group1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

16-02-nn TELnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

170 ◆ Networking

Programming20-01 : System Options

20-01 : System Options

DescriptionUse Program 20-01 : System Options to assign the refresh interval of for network busy lamp information.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Direct Station Selection


To enter data for Program 20-01 (System Options):


2. 20 01










Program

04 Network BLF IndicationUsed to determine how often the system updates the DSS key BLF indi-cations. Set the timer to 0 to disable the sending of BLF information.

For Networking, the entry should be �30� in all systems.

0-64800 in 100 ms

increments

0 30-05

20-01-01Operator_Access0:Step back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

20-01-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 171

Programming21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks

21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks

DescriptionUse Program 21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks to assign Program 14-06 routes for a networked system. This is required to seize the trunk in a networked system (Extension in System A tries to make an external call using a trunk in System B).

The route number is speciÞed for each system ID (01-50).

Input Data

Conditions

None

Feature Cross Reference● Central OfÞce Calls, Placing

● Networking




System ID 01-50

Item No. Day/Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program

01 Aspire S: 1-4Aspire: 1-8

Aspire S: 0-8Aspire: 0-100(0=No setting)

1 14-06

172 ◆ Networking

Programming21-16 : Trunk Group Routing for Networks


To enter data for Program 21-16 (Trunk Group Routing for Networks):


2. 21 16



or VOLUME ▼ keys.





21-16-01 SysID1Mode1 -RouteTbl1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

21-16-nn SysIDnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 173

Programming22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

DescriptionUse Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Ring Groups


IN � Available - 8 Ring Groups. � Available - 100 Ring Groups.



Item No. Day/Night Mode

Incoming Group Number Default Description Related

Program

01 Aspire S: 1-4

Aspire: 1-8

� 0 (No setting)� 1-8 or 001-100

(Incoming Group)� 102 (In-Skin/

External Voice Mail)� 103 (Centralized

Voice Mail)

1 Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups (22-04).

22-0422-06

174 ◆ Networking

Programming22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment


To enter data for Program 22-05 (Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment):


2. 22 05



VOLUME ▼ keys.





22-05-01 Trunk1Mode1 =1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select


Networking ◆ 175

Programming22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

DescriptionFor DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group.

You make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Direct Inward Line (DIL)

● Ring Group





Item No. Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default


0 (No setting)1-8 or 001-100 (Incoming Group)102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)103 (Centralized Voice Mail)

1

176 ◆ Networking

Programming22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination


To enter data for Program 22-08 (DIL/IRG No Answer Destination):


2. 22 08



VOLUME ▼ keys.





22-08-01 Trunk1Mode1 =1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select


Networking ◆ 177

Programming22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup

22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup

DescriptionUse Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation Tables.

Conditions None

Input Data

Default

ConditionsNone




Conversion Table Area Number 01-20

Item No. Item Input data

01 1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0-2000(0 = No setting)

1st Area Setup (End Address)

2nd Area Setup (Start Address)

2nd Area Setup (End Address)

Conversion Table Area 1st 2nd

Start Table End Table Start Table End Table

1 1 100 0 0

2 101 200 0 0

3 201 300 0 0

4 301 400 0 0

: : : : :

20 0 0 0 0

178 ◆ Networking

Programming22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup

Feature Cross Reference● Direct Inward Dialing (DID)


To enter data for Program 22-10 (DID Translation Table Setup):


2. 22 10


4. Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





22-10-01 Conv Area1No.1_Start_Add1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

22-10-nn Conv Areannnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 179

Programming22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion

22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion

DescriptionUse Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (2000):

● The digits received by the system (eight max.)

● The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits max.)

● The name that should show on the dialed extension�s display when it rings (twelve characters max.)

● The Transfer Target-1 and 2If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the

Þnal transfer destination (Program 22-10).

● Operation mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the Þrst character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press �2� three times.


SA � Available. � Available.


� Option 11 available. � Option 11 available with software 1.11+.

With Software 2.05+:Key for Entering Names

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 12 digits long. For prior software or when using i-Series phones, refer to the charts in

the Name Storing feature (page 432).

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .1 Enter characters:

1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | } →→→→ ←←←← Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. 3 Enter characters D-F, d-f, 3. 4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. 5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. 6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. 7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7. 8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8. 9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. 0 Enter characters:

0 ! � # $ % & � ( ) ô Õ ú ä ö ü α ε θ * Enter characters:


Pressing # again = Space. (In system programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept and/or add a space.)

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.CLEAR Clear all the entries from the point of the ßashing cursor and to the right.

180 ◆ Networking


Note: The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro. Refer to the program within the PCPro/WebPro application to determine the correct item number.

Input Data

Conversion Table Number 1-2000


01 Received Number Max. 8 digits No setting

02 Target Number Max. 24 digits No setting

03 DID Name Max. 12 characters No setting

04 Transfer Operation Mode 0 = No transfer1 = Busy

2 = No answer3 = Busy / No answer

0

05 Transfer Destination Number -1 0 = No setting1-8 or 1-100 = Incoming Group

101 = DSPDB Voice Mail102 = In-Skin/External Voice Mail

103 = Centralized Voice Mail201-264 = Department Group (1-8

or 01-64)400 = DID

401 = DISA1000-1999 = Abbreviated

Number (000-999)

0

06 Transfer Destination Number -2

Input Data Details:� 400 = Allows the outside party to dial a different DID

number in the translation table (for example, ring no answer to a dialed number, the caller then hears a dial tone, allowing them to enter another DID #).

� 401 = Provides the caller with DISA dialing options (requires the use of the DISA password).

0

07 Call Waiting 0 = Disable1 = Enabled

0

08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0-200 (0 = no limit) 0

09 Music on Hold Source 0 = IC/MOH Port1 = BGM Port2 = ACI Port

0

10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 in above : (0-96)

0

11 Ring Group TransferEnable (1) or disable (0) each conversation tables� abil-ity to follow the Ring Group programming deÞned in Program 22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group.

If Program 22-11-05 : DID Translation Number Con-version, Transfer Destination Number 1 and Program 22-11-06 : DID Translation Number Conversion, Transfer Destination Number 2 are set, the priority of transferring will be in this order: Program 22-11-05 then Program 22-11-06 then if Program 2-11-11 is enabled, Program 22-12-01.

0 = Disable1 = Enabled

1

Networking ◆ 181


ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 22-11 (DID Translation Number Conversion):


2. 22 11


4. Select the Conversation Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-UME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





22-11-01 Conv TBL 1Received_Dial back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

22-11-nn ConvTBLnnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

182 ◆ Networking

Programming22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group

22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group

DescriptionFor each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to deÞne the Þrst destination group for DID calls.

Depending on the entry in Program 22-09-02 and 22-11-04, the incoming calls will route to the Þrst destination group by the following:

● Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that there is no phone connected, no station card installed, or the extension number is not deÞned in Program 11-02)

● Busy intercept

● Ring-no-answer intercept

If the destination is '0', the calls will be forwarded to the trunk ring group deÞned in Program 22-11 based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.

Note: If Program 22-11-05 and 22-11-06 are set, the priority of transferring will be in this order:Program 22-11-05 ☞ Program 22-11-06 ☞ Program 22-12.

For busy and no-answer calls, if the Þrst and third destinations are programmed but the sec-ond destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destination after the Þrst destina-tion. If the Þrst and second destinations are not deÞned, but the third destination is, the call goes directly to the third destination (as deÞned in Program 22-12).

Input Data

ConditionsNone





Conversion Table Area Number 01-20

Item No. Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default


0 (No Setting)1-8 or 1-100 (Incoming Group)

101 (DSPDB Voice Mail)102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)

103 (Centralized Voice Mail)

1

Networking ◆ 183

Programming22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group


To enter data for Program 22-12 (DID Intercept Ring Group):


2. 22 12


4. Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





22-12-01 Conv Area1Mode1 =1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

22-12-nn Conv Areannnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

184 ◆ Networking

Programming25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing

25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing

DescriptionUse Program 25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what hap-pens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, you make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Direct Inward System Access (DISA)





Item No. Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program


0 (Disconnect)1-8 or 1-100 (Incoming Group)

102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)103 (Centralized Voice Mail)

0 22-04

Networking ◆ 185

Programming25-03 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing


To enter data for Program 25-03 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing):


2. 25 03


4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲

or VOLUME ▼ keys.





25-03-01 Trk Port 1Mode1 Target_IRG=0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

25-03-nn Trk Portnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

186 ◆ Networking

Programming25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

DescriptionUse Program 25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operat-ing mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Trans-fer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operat-ing Mode, you make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Direct Inward System Access (DISA)





Item No. Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default Related Program


0 (Disconnect)1-8 or 1-100 (Incoming Ring Group)

102 (In-Skin/External Voice Mail)103 (Centralized Voice Mail)

0 22-04

Networking ◆ 187

Programming25-04 : VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy


To enter data for Program 25-04 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy):


2. 25 04


4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲

or VOLUME ▼ keys.





25-04-01 Trk Port 1Mode1 Target_IRG=0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

25-04-nn Trk Portnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

188 ◆ Networking

Programming26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service

DescriptionUse Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to deÞne the system options for Auto-matic Route Selection (ARS).

Input Data



� Option 6 available with 2.63+ software. � Option 6 available with 2.63+ software.


01 ARS ServiceEnable or disable ARS.


0

02 Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS TimerWith Networking, this timer replaces 20-03-04 when determining if all network protocol digits have been received. If ARS is enabled at Site B, this timer can be pro-grammed for 5 (500 msec) at Site A. If ARS is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for outbound dialing, this timer should be pro-grammed for 30 (3 seconds) at Site A.

0-64800 (msec.) 30

03 ARS Misdialed Number HandlingIf a user dials a number not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over trunk group 1 or play error tone.

0 = Route to Trunk Group 1

1 = Play Warning Tone to Dialer

1

04 LCR Mode - Not Used in the U.S. - 0

06 ARS COS Match AccessWith the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature, you can determine whether the system should allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table (Program 26-02). This change can be used to create a tenant-like application. It will then use the trunk group deÞned in the Additional Entry in Program 26-02-03 to place the out-going call.

When this feature is enabled, the calls will be routed in sequential order, and will for-ward provided the Class of Service for the trunk groups match.

0 = Disabled (COS not compared)

1 = Enabled (COS Match Access)

0

Networking ◆ 189

Programming26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Automatic Route Selection


To enter data for Program 26-01 (Automatic Route Selection Service):


2. 26 01






26-01-01ARS Service 0:Off back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

26-01-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

190 ◆ Networking

Programming26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR

26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR

DescriptionUse Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR to set pre-transaction tables for selecting Automatic Route Selection (ARS).

● Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - The number routes to a trunk group.

● Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.

Input Data



� Dial Analysis Tables increased from 200 to 400 with software 2.63+.

� Dial Analysis Tables increased from 200 to 400 with software 2.63+.

Dial Analysis Table Number 1-400


01 Dial Dial Digits (16 digits maximum)1-9, 0, *, #, or @ for wild character

(Press line key 1)

No Setting

02 Service Type 0 = No ARS1 = Route to Trunk Group2 = Select F-Route Access

0

03 Additional Data / Service Number

In Service Type 1: Select Trunk Group Number (0-100, 0=no route)

In Service Type 2:F-Route Time Schedule Not Used =

0-500 (F-Route Table Number). Refer to Program 44-05.

F-Route Time Schedule Used = 0-500 (F-Route Selection Number).

Refer to Program 44-04.

0

04 ARS Class of Service 0-16 10

05 Dial Treatment 0-15 0

Networking ◆ 191

Programming26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR

ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 26-02 (Dial Analysis Table for ARS/LCR):


2. 26 02






06 LCR Carrier TableSelect the Carrier Table to be used for dial edit. Table 1 is a special table - this table will be automatically used for all numbers that begin with �0� and which do not correspond with the entry in Program 26-02-01.

0-25 0

26-02-01 Analysis Tbl1Dial back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

26-02-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→


192 ◆ Networking

Programming26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments

26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments

DescriptionUse Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02. The ARS Dial Treatment options are:

● 3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.Requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● 2 - Delete the leading �1� if dialed as part of the initial call.Requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● 1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call.Requires at least 8 digits in the ARS table (Program 26-02-01).

● INPA - Insert the NPA speciÞed by NPA.

● DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 out-dials 1234. Valid entries are 0-9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each digits code counts as a digit. So for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would look like: D05P1234. This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone program-ming.

● Wnn - Wait nn seconds.

● P - Pause in analog trunk.

● R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modiÞcations

● E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.

● X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the system to output the extension number of the call�s originator to the black box for the E911 feature.

● An - For Alternate Carrier Access (n = 1 ~ 4). The numeric digit instructs the system to insert a Transit Network Selection information element in the SETUP message and also identiÞes which code in Program 26-11 will be included in the information element. This function is valid only for outbound calls by ISDN trunks.

Input Data

ConditionsNone



� �An� Dial Treatment available with 2.64+ software.

� �An� Dial Treatment available with 2.64+ software.

Dial Treatment Table Number 1-15

Item No. Input Data Default

01 24 characters maximum No Setting

Networking ◆ 193

Programming26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments



To enter data for Program 26-03 (ARS Dial Treatments):


2. 26 03






26-03-01 ARS Treatment1

back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

26-03-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

194 ◆ Networking

Programming26-04 : ARS Class of Service

26-04 : ARS Class of Service

DescriptionUse Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set an extension�s ARS Class of Service. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route an extension�s calls.

Input Data

ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 26-04 (ARS Class of Service):


2. 26 04








Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item No. Day/Night Mode Class Default


0-16 0

26-04-01 TEL301Mode1:COS 0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

26-04-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 195

Programming44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route

DescriptionUse Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to deÞne the system options for the ARS/F-Route feature.

Input Data

ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route


To enter data for Program 44-01 (System Options for ARS/F-Route):


2. 44 01










01 ARS/F-Route Time ScheduleIf this option is set to �0�, the F-Route table selected is determined only by the digits dialed without any relation to the day or time of the call.If this option is set to �1�, the system Þrst refers to Program 44-10. If there is a match, the pattern deÞned in that program is used. If not, the F-Route pat-tern in Program 44-09 and time setting in 44-08 are used.

0 = Not Used1 = Used

0

44-01-01F-Route_Mode 0:No back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-01-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

196 ◆ Networking

Programming44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access

44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access

DescriptionUse Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.

Input Data






01 DialSet the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing.

Up to 8 digits(Use line key 1 for a �Don�t Care�

digit, @)

No setting

02 Service Type� Service Type 1 (Extension number)

The number goes to an extension after delet-ing the front digit(s).

Additional dataAssign the digit(s) to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage. There must be at least one digit deleted.

� Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route)The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route table.

Additional dataIf the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is not used, assign the ARS/F-Route table number for Program 44-05. If the ARS/F-Route Time Schedule is used, assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for Program 44-04.

� Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table)The total length of the number exceeds more than 8 digits.

Additional dataAssign the Dial Extension Analysis Table number to be used in Program 44-03.

0=No setting1=Extension Call2=ARS/F-Route Table3=Dial Extension Analyze Table

0

Networking ◆ 197


ConditionsNone


03 Additional DataFor the Service Type selected in 44-02-02, enter the additional data required.� 1: Delete Digit = 0-255 (255=delete all digits)� 2: [Program 44-01 : 0]

ARS/F-Route Table Number = 0-500 (0=No setting)Refer to Program 44-05. [Program 44-01 : 1]ARS/F-Route Select Table Number = 0-500 (0=No setting)Refer to Program 44-04.

� 3: Dial Extension Analyze Table Number = 0-4 (0=No setting)Refer to Program 44-03.

� 1: Delete Digit = 0-255(255 : delete all digits)

� 2: 0-500 (0=No setting)� 3: Dial Extension Analyze

Table Number = 0-4 (0=No setting)

0

04 Dial Tone SimulationIf enabled, this option sends dial tone to the call-ing party once the routing is determined. This may be required if the central ofÞce at the desti-nation does not send dial tone.

0=off1=on

0


198 ◆ Networking



To enter data for Program 44-02 (Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access):


2. 44 02


4. Select the Analyze Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





44-02-01 Analyze TBL1Dial back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-02-nn Analyze TBLnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 199

Programming44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table

44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table

DescriptionWhen Program 44-02-02 is set to type �3�, use Program 44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table to set the dial extension analysis table. These tables are used when the analyzed digits must be more than 8 digits. If the received digits do not match the digits set in tables 1-250, table number 252 is used refer to the next Extension Table Area (1-4) to be searched. If the received digits are not iden-tiÞed in tables 1-250, the F-Route selection table number deÞned in table 251 is used.

Note: The item numbers indicated below are different when using PCPro/WebPro due to the win-dow layout of the applications. Refer to the program within the PCPro/WebPro application to determine the correct item number.

Input Data

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1-250

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251




Extension Table Area Number 1-4



01 Dial Up to 24 digitsDigits = 1-9, 0, *, #, @

(Press Line Key 1 for wild character @)

No setting

02 ARS/F-Route Select Table Number

0-500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is then checked.With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is then checked.

0


03 ARS/F-Route Select table Number

0-500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number)With Program 44-01 set to 0, Program 44-05 is then checked.With Program 44-01 set to 1, Program 44-04 is then checked.

0

200 ◆ Networking

Programming44-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table

Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 44-03 (Dial Analysis Extension Table):


2. 44 03


4. Select the Extension Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-UME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.






04 Next Table Area Number 0-4 0

44-03-01 Exp-Table 1001:Dial = back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-03-nn Exp-Table nnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 201

Programming44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule

44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule

DescriptionUse Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are 8 time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1-500

Item No. ARS/F-Route Time Mode ARS/F-Route Table Number Default

01 1-8 0-500 0

202 ◆ Networking

Programming44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule


To enter data for Program 44-04 (ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule):


2. 44 04


4. Select the ARS/F-Route Selection number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





44-04-01 Select No 1F-Route Mode1=0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-04-nn Select No nnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 203

Programming44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table

44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table

DescriptionUse Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are 4 kinds of order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group will be used. If a lower pri-ority route is selected, the caller may be notiÞed with a beep tone.

Input Data




ARS/F-Route Table Number 1-500

Priority Number 1-4


01 Trunk Group NumberSelect the trunk group number to be used for the outgoing ARS call.

0-100, 101-150, 255(0 = No setting, 101-150 =

Networking, 255 = Extension Call)

0

02 Delete DigitsEnter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number.

0-255(255 = Delete all)

0

03 Additional Dial Number TableEnter the table number (deÞned in Program 44-06) for additional digits to be dialed.

0-1000 0

04 Beep ToneSelect whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used to dial out.

0 = off1 = on

0

05 Gain Table Number for Internal CallsSelect the gain table number to be used for the internal call (deÞned in Program 44-07).

0-500(0 = No setting)

0

06 Gain Table Number for Tandem ConnectionsSelect the gain table number to be used for the tandem call (deÞned in Program 44-07).

0-500(0 = No setting)

0

07 ARS Class of ServiceSelect the ARS Class of Service to be used for the table. An extension�s ARS COS is determined in Program 26-04-01.

0-16 0

204 ◆ Networking

Programming44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table

ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 44-05 (ARS/F-Route Table):


2. 44 05


4. Select the ARS/F-Route Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





08 Dial TreatmentSelect the Dial Treatment to be used for the table. If a Dial Treatment is selected, Programs 44-05-02 and 44-05-03 are ignored and the Dial Treatment deÞned in Program 26-03-01 is used instead.

0-15 0

44-05-01 F-route TBL1PRI1:TRK GP =0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-05-nn F-route TBLnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 205

Programming44-06 : Additional Dial Table

44-06 : Additional Dial Table

DescriptionUse Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-Route number. The Additional Dial Table used is determined in Program 44-05-03.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





Additional Dial Table Number 1-1000

Item No. Additional Dial Default

01 Up to 24 digitsEnter: 1-9, 0, *, #, Pause (press line key 1 to enter a pause)

No setting

206 ◆ Networking

Programming44-06 : Additional Dial Table


To enter data for Program 44-06 (Additional Dial Table):


2. 44 06


4. Select the Additional Dial Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





4-06-01 Add TBL1Dial = back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-06-nn Add TBLnnnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 207

Programming44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access

44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access

DescriptionUse Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the gain/PAD table. If an exten-sion dials ARS/F-Route number;

● The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.

● The Extension Dial Gain Table follows �Outgoing transmit� and �Outgoing receive� settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route;

● The Tandem Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.

● The Tandem Gain Table follows the �Incoming transmit� and �Incoming receive� settings for incoming line, and �Outgoing transmit� and �Outgoing receive� settings for the outgoing line.

Note: For ARS/F-Route calls, the CODEC gains deÞned in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-03 are not activated.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





Gain Table Number 1-500


01 Incoming Transmit 1-63(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)

32

02 Incoming Receive 1-63(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)

32

03 Outgoing Transmit 1-63(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)

32

04 Outgoing Receive 1-63(-15.5 ~ +15.5dB)

32

208 ◆ Networking

Programming44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access


To enter data for Program 44-07 (Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access):


2. 44 07


4. Select the Gain Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲

or VOLUME ▼ keys.





44-07-01 Gain TBL 1INC Transmit 32 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-07-nn Gain TBL nnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 209

Programming44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route

44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route

DescriptionUse Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to deÞne the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

Input Data

DefaultAll Schedule Patterns : 0:00 � 0:00, Mode 1

Example:

Pattern 1

Time Number 01 : 00:00 � 08:00 Mode 3Time Number 02 : 08:00 � 18:00 Mode 1Time Number 03 : 18:00 � 22:00 Mode 2Time Number 04 : 22:00 � 00:00 Mode 3

Pattern 2

Time Number 01 : 0:00 � 0:00 Mode 2

ConditionsNone




Schedule Pattern Number 01-10

Item No. Time Number Start Time End Time Mode

01 01-20 0000-2359 0000-2359 1-8

0:00 8:00 18:00 22:00 0:00

Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

0:00 0:00

Mode 2

210 ◆ Networking

Programming44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route



To enter data for Program 44-08 (Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route):


2. 44 08


4. Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼ keys.





44-08-01 Time Pttn 1T-Zone01:Start =00:00 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-08-nn Time Pttn nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 211

Programming44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route

44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route

DescriptionUse Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to deÞne a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-Route. The pattern number is deÞned in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

ConditionsNone





Item No. Day Number Schedule Pattern Number Default

01 1 = Sunday 1-10 Pattern 1

2 = Monday 1-10 Pattern 1

3 = Tuesday 1-10 Pattern 1

4 = Wednesday 1-10 Pattern 1

5 = Thursday 1-10 Pattern 1

6 = Friday 1-10 Pattern 1

7 = Saturday 1-10 Pattern 1

212 ◆ Networking

Programming44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route


To enter data for Program 44-09 (Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route):


2. 44 09






44-09-01Sunday Pattern=1 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-09-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 213

Programming44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route

44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route

DescriptionUse Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to deÞne a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays. The pattern number is deÞned in Program 44-08-01.

Input Data

ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 44-10 (Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route):


2. 44 10









Item No. Date Schedule Pattern Number Default

01 0101- 1231 0-10(0 = No setting)

No Setting

44-10-01Date01/01 =PTTN_0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

44-10-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

214 ◆ Networking

Programming45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options

DescriptionUse Program 45-01 :Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration options.

Input Data



� Program 45-01-10 not available. � Program 45-01-10 available with software 4.94+.


01 Voice Mail Department Group NumberAssign which Extension (Department) Group number is to be assigned as the voice mail group (non-networked system).An entry of �0� means there is no voice mail installed. When using Centralized Voice Mail with Aspire Mail or IntraMail, this program and Program 45-01-08 must both be programmed with the same group number. Otherwise, the audio path may not connected properly.

Aspire S: 0-8Aspire: 0 - 64

(0=no voice mail)

0

02 Voice Mail Master NameEnter the Voice Mail master name (non-networked system).

Up to 12 Characters Voice Mail

03 Voice Mail ScreeningEnable/disable the system�s ability to pro-cess the Call Screening commands (1 + extension number) sent from the Voice Mail. You should normally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your sys-tem has been modiÞed so that extensions begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also see the Flexible System Numbering feature.

0 = Off1 = On

1

04 Park and PageEnable/disable the system�s ability to pro-cess the Voice Mail�s Park and Page (*) commands. You should normally enable this option.

0 = Off1 = On

1

Networking ◆ 215


ConditionsNone

Feature Cross Reference● Voice Mail

05 Message WaitEnable/disable the system�s ability to pro-cess the Voice Mail�s Message Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed Message NotiÞcation strings don�t contain the code #9 for trunk access.

0 = Off1 = On

1

06 Record Alert Tone Interval TimeThis timer sets the interval between voice Mail Conversation Record alerts

0-64800 seconds 0

07 Mailbox NumberEnter the extension number of the voice mail to be accessed as the centralized voice mail unit when the Networking fea-ture is used.

Up to 8 Digits -

08 Networked Voice Mail Department Group NumberAssign which Extension (Department) Assign which Extension (Department) Group number is to be assigned as the voice mail group with a networked sys-tem. An entry of �0� means there is no voice mail installed. When using Central-ized Voice Mail with Aspire Mail or Intra-Mail, this program and Program 45-01-01 must both be programmed with the same group number. Otherwise, the audio path may not connected properly.

Aspire S: 0 - 8Aspire: 0 - 64

(0=no voice mail)

0

09 Networked Voice Mail Master NameEnter the Voice Mail master name (networked system).

Up to 12 Characters C.V.M.

10 NSL Protocol SupportAspire M/L/XL OnlyThis option must be enabled (1) in order for the display to use the NSL protocol.

0 = NSL Protocol Disabled1 = NSL Protocol Enabled

0

216 ◆ Networking



To enter data for Program 45-01 (Voice Mail Integration Options):


2. 45 01






45-01-01 STG No. of VM 0 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

45-01-nn nnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 217

Programming84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup to deÞne the data of H.323 trunks. Refer to Program 84-12 for H.323 extensions and IP Networking CODEC�s.

Note that the value of Item 33 (Audio Capability Priority) determines which CODEC settings to use. This means, for example, that if G.711 is selected in Item 33, the settings in Items 5-12 and 19-21 will be ignored.

Input Data



� Items 60 and 61 available.


� Items 60 and 61 available with software 1.18+. Requires VOIPU PCB Þrmware 3.2+.



01 -- Not Used --

02 Number of G711 Audio Frame 2 = 20 ms3 = 30 ms


03 G711 Silence Detection Mode 0:Disable1:Enable

0 DeÞne whether the silence detection enables on G711 or not

04 G711 type 0:A-law1: u-law

1 Set the type of G711(A-law or u-law)

05 G729 Audio Frame 1 = 10 ms2 = 20 ms3 = 30 ms4 = 40 ms5 = 50 ms6 = 60 ms7 = 70 ms8 = 80 ms



0

07 G.729 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0-500 ms 30

08 G.729 Jitter Buffer Type 0-500 ms 60

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0-500 ms 120

10 -- Not Used --

218 ◆ Networking


11 Number of G723 Audio Frame 1 = 30 msec2 = 60 msec



0

13 Maximum value of Jitter Delay 0-65535 msec 60 msec Maximum value of Jitter Delay for audio delay

14 -- Not Used --


silence3 = adaptive immedi-

ately

1 Set the mode of Jitter Buffer

16 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~145 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~145 ms 60 Set the average value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~145 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.711 Jitter Buffer

19 G.723,G.729 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~500 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.723, G.729Jitter Buffer

20 G.723, G.729 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~500 ms 60 Set the average value of G.723, G.729 Jitter Buffer

21 G.723,G.729 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~500 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.723, G.729Jitter Buffer

22 VAD threshold 0-30(-20db~+10db)

0:-20db (-50dbm)1:-19db (-49dbm)

:20 = 0db

(-30dbm) :

29 = 9dbm (-21dbm)30:10dbm

(-20dbm)

20 Threshold of silence detectionChange value based �30Become invalid item if item 03 is set to Disable


Networking ◆ 219


23 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000(-5000 ~ -7000dbm)

5000 = -5000dbm :

7000 = -7000dbm

7000 Noise level of silence

24 Echo canceler mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1 Determine whether or not to use Echo canceller.

25 Echo canceler tail size 1 = 8 ms2 = 16 ms3 = 32mS


26 Echo canceler nlp mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0 Non-linear processing mode

27 Echo canceler nlp noise 40-70 (-40~-70)

40 = -40 dbm :

70 = -70 dbm


28 Echo canceler cng cfg 0 = adaptive1 = Þxed


29 Echo canceler 4w det 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

30 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

31 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

32 -- Not Used --

33 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711 PT1:G723 PT2:G729 PT

0 The option selected here determines what other options are applied from this program.


220 ◆ Networking


34 Bandwidth Control 0:Disable1:Enable

0 Controls the voice bandwidth on an H.323 trunk.

35 Maximum Bandwidth 0-65535kbps 0 The maximum total bandwidth limita-tion for voice packets.

36 Fax Max Rate 24 = V.27ter, 2400 bps48 = V.27ter, 4800 bps

72 = V.29, 7200 bps96 = V.29, 9600 bps

120 = V17, 12000 bps144 = V.17, 14400 bps

5

37 Fax Playout FIFO Nominal Delay

0-600 ms 300 ms Increase the value for networks which experience large packet losses.

38 Fax Packet Size 20-48 bytes 20

39 Fax Modem Transmit Level 0-130dBm -13dBm

6(-6dBm)

40 Fax Modem CD Threshold 0 = -26dBm1 = -33dBm2 = -43dBm

1

41 Fax No Activity Timeout Duration

10-32000 sec 30

42 Override Encapsulation Method 0 = Open Channel DeÞned Packet Encap-

sulation1 = T.38 UDP

2 = T.38/TRP UDP

1 T.38/TRP UDPVoice-FaxClose-Reopen

43 High Speed Data Packet Rate 10-80 ms 60

44 Low Speed Data Redundancy 0-8 0

45 High Speed Data Redundancy 0-2 0

46 TCF Handling Method 1 = TCF is Locally Gen-erated and Checked

2 = TCF is Sent Over the Network

1 For H.323 negotiation

47 Maximum Low Speed Data Packetization

1

48 Transmit Network Timeout 10-32000 sec 150 sec

49 Eßag Start Timer 0-65535 2600 ms

50 Eßag Stop Timer 0-65535 2300 ms

51 Fax Relay: Scan Line Fix Up Feature


1


Networking ◆ 221


ConditionsYou must log out of system programming in order for changes to the following items will take affect:

Item 39 Item 53Item 40 Item 54Item 41 Item 55Item 49 Item 56Item 50 Item 57Item 51 Item 58Item 52


52 Fax Relay: Eßags for First DIS 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

53 Fax Relay: FOP Protocol Enhancement


1

54 Fax Relay: NSF Override 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

55 T30: ECM 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

56 T30: MR Page Compression 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

57 NSF Country Code 0-65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

58 NSF Vendor Code 65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

59 Fax Relay Function 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0 Determine whether or not the Fax Relay function should be used.


1


62 H.323 DTMF Payload Number 0 = VOIPU1 = RFC2833

2 = H.2453 = Disable

0 DeÞne the H.323 DTMF Payload Number.


222 ◆ Networking



To enter data for Program 84-01 (CODEC Information Basic Setup):


2. 84 01






84-01-01RAS Ucast Port20001 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-01-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

Networking ◆ 223

Programming84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup

84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup to deÞne the data of H.225 and H.245.

It is recommended that these settings are left at the default values unless you are advised to change the values by NEC Infrontia.

Input Data





01 H.225 Alerting Timer 0-255 sec 180 sec

02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0-255 sec 9 sec

03 H.225 Setup Timer 0-255 sec 4 sec

04 H.225 Info Ack Timer 0-255 sec 9 sec

05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0-255 sec 10 sec

06 -- Not Used --

07 H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

08 H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry Count

0-255 sec 3 sec

09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

10 H.245 Logical Channel Establishment Timer

0-255 sec 50 sec Unidirectional or bi-directional logi-cal channel establishment timer

11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0-255 sec 50 sec

15 RAS GRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

16 GRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

17 RAS RRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

18 RRQ Retry Count 0-255 3

19 RAS URQ Timer 0-255 sec 3

224 ◆ Networking


ConditionsNone


20 URQ Retry Count 0-255 1

21 RAS ARQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

22 ARQ Retry Count 0-255 2

23 RAS BRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

24 BRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

25 RAS IRR Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

26 IRR Retry Count 0-255 2

27 RAS DRQ Timer 0-255 sec 8 sec

28 DRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

29 RAS LRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

30 LRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

31 RAS RAI Timer 0-255 sec 3 sec

32 RAI Retry Count 0-255 2

33 Call Signaling Port Number 0-65535 1730 It is control port for IP Telephone

34 - Not Used -

35 Fast Start 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1 If VoIP is used for networking, the Fast Start option must be enabled.

36 RAS 0-65535 20001

37 Terminal Type 0-255 60 H.245 Terminal Type


Networking ◆ 225



To enter data for Program 84-02 (H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup):


2. 84 02






84-02-01H225 Alert Time 180sec. back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-02-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

226 ◆ Networking

Programming84-04 : VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup

84-04 : VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-04 : VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup to determine whether the VOIPU PCB should use a manually assigned IP Address or if it should obtain its IP Address from a DHCP server.

Input Data

ConditionsThe system programming must be exited before this program option takes affect.



MF � Available. � Available.


� With software 2.63+, this program requires the manufacturer level password.

� With software 2.63+, this program requires the manufacturer level password.

Item No. Description Input Data Default

01 DHCP Server ModeDeÞne whether or not the DHCP Server is used.

If this item is set to 0:Disable, the values in Pro-gram 84-05 will be used.If this item is set to 1:Enable, the VOIPU will try to obtain an IP address from a DHCP Server. The DHCP server could be external (i.e. on the LAN), or could be the NTCPU (if Program 10-13-01 is enabled)

0:Disable1:Enable

0

Networking ◆ 227

Programming84-04 : VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup


To enter data for Program 84-04 (VOIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup):


2. 84 04






84-04-01DHCP Serv.Mode0:Off back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-04-nnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

228 ◆ Networking

Programming84-05 : VOIPU IP Address Setup

84-05 : VOIPU IP Address Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-05 : VOIPU IP Address Setup to deÞne the IP Address of the VOIPU PCB.

Input Data

ConditionsThe system programming must be exited before these program options to take affect.





Slot Number 01-16

Item Description Input Data Default Related Program

01 IP AddressSets the IP Address of each VOIPU PCB.Each slot (1-16) on the Aspire has a setting. The IP Address will be increased in accordance with the slot number.

If Program 84-04 is enabled, this setting will be ignored

1.0.0.1�126.255.255.254 128.1.0.1�191.254255.254192.0.1.1�223.255.254.254

Slot 1: 172.16.0.20Slot 2: 172.16.0.21Slot 3: 172.16.0.22Slot 4: 172.16.0.23Slot 5: 172.16.0.24Slot 6: 172.16.0.25Slot 7: 172.16.0.26Slot 8: 172.16.0.27Slot 9: 172.16.0.28Slot 10: 172.16.0.29Slot 11: 172.16.0.30Slot 12: 172.16.0.31Slot 13: 172.16.0.32Slot 14: 172.16.0.33Slot 15: 172.16.0.34Slot 16: 172.16.0.35

84-04 This become invalid data if Program 84-04 is set to 1:Enable.

02 LAN InterfaceThis sets the mode for the NIC (Network Interface Card) on the VOIPU. This can usually be set to Auto Detect.

0 = Auto Detect1 = 100 Mbps, Full Duplex2 = 100 Mbps, Half Duplex3 = 10 Mbps, Full Duplex4 = 10 Mbps, Half Duplex

0

Networking ◆ 229

Programming84-05 : VOIPU IP Address Setup


To enter data for Program 84-05 (VOIPU IP Address Setup):


2. 84 05


4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or

VOLUME ▼ keys.





84-05-01 Slot1IP Add 172.16 .0 .20 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-05-nn Slotnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

230 ◆ Networking

Programming84-06 : VOIPU Setup

84-06 : VOIPU Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-06 : VOIPU Setup to setup the details of VOIPU PCB.

Input Data



� Items 13 and 14 available.


� Items 13 and 14 available with software 1.18+. Requires VOIPU PCB Þrmware 3.2+.


SLOT Number 01-16


01 RTP Port Number 0-65535 10020 Set the UPD port number to be used for RTP trafÞc.

02 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021 This must be set to RTP Port Number (item 01) + 1.

03 H.245 Port Number 0-65535 10100

04 Fractlost Threshold 0-4294967295 ms 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

05 Packets Lost Threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

06 Ext High Sequence Threshold

0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

07 Jitter Threshold 0-4294967295 sec 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

08 Last LSR Threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

09 Delay LSR Threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the value exceeds the deÞned value.

10 DTMF Behavior 0 = DTMF Relay disabled1 = In-Band DTMF relay,

do NOT report to Host processor

2 = Out of Band DTMF relay, do not pass tones as

voice

0 � Inbound - DTMF is transferred by RTP packets.

� Outbound - DTMF is transferred by H.245 protocol.

This setting allows DTMF digits to be relayed between the VOIPU PCBs. It is recommended that this is set to �1�.

Networking ◆ 231

Programming84-06 : VOIPU Setup

ConditionsThe system programming must be exited before these program options to take affect.



To enter data for Program 84-06 (VOIPU Setup):


2. 84 06


4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME ▲ or

VOLUME ▼ keys.





11 Ready/Ready-Answer Port Number

0-65535 4000

12 Long Tail Echo (LTEC) Mode

0 = Off1 = On

0

13 Long Tail Echo Code (LTEC) Type

1 = G.729AB2 = G.723.1

1

14 Long Tail Echo (LTEC) Tail Size

1 = 8msec2 = 16msec3 = 32msec4 = 64msec5 = 128msec

5

15 10ms Payload Mode 0 = Off1 = On

0

84-06-01 Slot1RTP Port No. 10020 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-06-nn Slotnnnnnnn ←←←← →→→→

232 ◆ Networking

Programming84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup

84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup

DescriptionUse Program 84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup to setup the CODEC information of H.323 phones and IP Networking. Refer to Program 84-01 for H.323 trunk CODECs.

Input Data




� Item 32 available with software 4.93+


� Item 32 available with software 4.93+


Program

01 G711 Audio FramePrior to software 2.63, the only entry possible was �2� or �3�. With software 2.63+, additional entries are available.

Note: Currently, only the Aspire S system can use the 10ms setting. Aspire will provide this option in the future.

1 - 3(1 = 10ms, 2 = 20 ms, 3 = 30ms)

3

02 G711 VAD Mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0

03 G711 Type 0 = A-law1 = μ-law

1




07 G.729 Audio FramePrior to software 2.63, only entries 3-8 were available. With software 2.63+, additional entries are available.

Note: Currently, only the Aspire S system can use the 10ms setting. Aspire will provide this option in the future

1-8 (1 = 10ms,

2 = 20ms, etc.)

3


0




Networking ◆ 233


12 G.723 Audio Frame 1-2 1


0





silence3 = adaptive immed

1

18 VAD Threshold 0-30 (19db~+10db,Adaptec threshold)

0 = Adaptec threshold1 = -19db(-49dbm)

:20 = 0db (-30dbm)

:29 = 9dbm(-21dbm)30 = 10dbm(-20dbm)

20

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 (-5000_-7000dbm)

5000:-5000dbm :

7000:-7000dbm

7000

20 Echo Canceler Mode 0 = Disable1 = Enable

1

21 Echo Canceler Tail Size84-12-20 - Disable

1 = 8 ms2 = 16 ms3 = 32mS

2

22 Echo Canceler NLP ModeNon-linear processing mode


0

23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise84-12-22 - Disable

40-70 (-40~-70)

40 = -40 dbm :

70 = -70 dbm

70

24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG84-12-22 - Disable

0 = adaptive1 = Þxed

0

25 Echo Canceler 4w Det 0 = Disable1 = Enable

0


Program

234 ◆ Networking


26 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

27 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14)

0 = -14 dbm1 = -13 dbm

:14 = 0 dbm

:27 = 13 dbm28 = 14 dbm

14

28 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711_PT1:G723_PT2:G729_PT

0


0


31 DTMF Relay ModeIn-band signaling is the way to send DTMF tone just as audio (in band of the RTP packet). There is no other message sent to the far end for the DTMF digits. Therefore, if this is used with G.729 protocol, the DTMF tone will not be received properly. At the level G.729 compresses the audio, it affects the actual DTMF tone and it can not be interpreted by the far end. This is by the design of VoIP and there is no way to correct it. If G.729 is used, then out-of-band signal-ing is required when DTMF digits need to be sent over the network.

Out-of-band signaling sends a special message to the far end for the DTMF digits (out of band of the RTP packet). The actual DTMF audio will be muted. There are two signaling types - RFC2833 and H.245/VOIPU. Both signaling types should work on every protocol (G.729, G.711, etc.). RFC2833 must be selected in order for DTMF digits to be sent over the network.

0 = Disable1 = RFC28332 = VOIPU

2 84-06-10 : VOIPU Setup

- DTMF Behavior for

the card slot of the VoIP card to out of band (an entry of

"2")


Program

Networking ◆ 235


ConditionsNone



To enter data for Program 84-12 (H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup):


2. 84 12






32 FAX RelaySelect "2" for FAX Relay to SLT (Program 15-03-03:special), Trunk and networking.

Refer to Program 84-01-36 through 84-01-57 for FAX Relay options.


2 = Each Port Mode

0

84-12-01 G711 Audio Frame 3 back ↑↑↑↑ ↓↓↓↓ select

84-12-nn nnnnn ←←←← →→→→


Program

236 ◆ Networking

Appendix Aspire Networking Examples

Appendix

Aspire Networking Examples

Section 4

Appendix

Aspire Networking ExamplesThe examples in this section are only a guide to the conÞguration required on the Aspire to install the Networking feature.

Note that the Aspire M/L/XL must have a Feature Upgrade PAL or Enhanced PAL in order to use the Networking feature. The Aspire S requires the ENTU LAN card in order to use VoIP PCBs.

Networking ◆ 237


ISDN Networking Examples

ISDN BRI (Aspire M/L/XL Only)Networking Basic Rate Interface ISDN is supported on all BRI PCB�s (2, 4 or 8 BRIU). Each cir-cuit of the BRIU PCB can be set independently to Trunk / S0 / Networking mode.

Each circuit set as Networking mode will require 2 of the Networking ports on the system, there are a total of 26 (Aspire S), 256 (Aspire M/L), or 384 (Aspire XL) Networking ports available.

The example below shows two Aspire systems, each has a BRIU card installed with one circuit set to Mode 4 for Networking. The two BRIU circuits are cross connected via a 2-pair twisted cable.

Aspire A has extension numbers in the range 300-399, Aspire B has 400-499.

More Than One Circuit RequiredIf more BRI circuits were added, then Program 10-03-xx would be copied for each new circuit.

Master/Slave SettingThe choice of Master/Slave of each circuit is not important in the example above as there is no ISDN Network connection to either of the systems.

If System A had an ISDN Network connection (BRI trunk or PRI trunk), then System A would be the Master for the networking circuits.

If both System A and System B have an ISDN Network connection, then the setting of Master/Slave is not important.

When the Networking BRI circuit is connected to external equipment, then ensure that the equip-ment is set to Master (Clock generator) or Slave (Clock receiver) accordingly.

Aspire A Aspire B

Program 10-03 BRI PCB Setup� 10-03-01 = Mode 4� 10-03-03 = P-P� 10-03-10 = Master� 10-03-11 = 1

Program 10-03 BRI PCB Setup� 10-03-01 = Mode 4� 10-03-03 = P-P� 10-03-10 = Slave� 10-03-11 = 1

Program 11-01-01 System Numbering� Dial 3x = 3 digit, Type 2 (Intercom)� Dial 4x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking),

ID=1

Program 11-01-01 System Numbering� Dial 3x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking),

ID=1� Dial 4x = 3 digit, Type 2 (Intercom)

2-pair twisted cable

Aspire A Aspire B

238 ◆ Networking


ISDN PRI (Aspire M/L/XL Only)Networking Primary Rate Interface ISDN is supported on the standard PRI PCB�s. Each PRIU PCB can be set independently to Trunk / S0 / Networking mode. When set to Networking, a PRIU PCB will require 24 of the Networking ports on the system, there are a total of 26 (Aspire S), 256 (Aspire M/L), or 384 (Aspire XL) Networking ports available.

The example below shows two Aspire systems, each has a PRIU card installed, which are set to Mode 4 for Networking. The two PRIU PCB�s are cross connected via a 2-pair twisted cable.

Aspire A has extension numbers in the range 300-399, Aspire B has 400-499.

More Than One Circuit RequiredIf more PRI PCBs were added, then Program 10-03-xx would be copied for each new PCB.

CRC-4 SettingThe choice of CRC-4 on/off is not important in the example. When connected to external PRI equipment, ensure that this option is set the same as the external equipment.

Master/Slave SettingThe choice of Master/Slave of each circuit is not important in the example above as there is no ISDN Network connection to either of the systems.

If System A had an ISDN Network connection (BRI trunk or PRI trunk), then System A would be the Master for Networking circuits.

If both System A and System B have an ISDN Network connection, then the setting of Master/Slave is not important.

When the Networking PRI circuit is connected to external equipment, then ensure that the equip-ment is set to Master (Clock generator) or Slave (Clock receiver) accordingly.

Limit the Quantity of B-Channels AvailableUse Program 10-32-01 to limit the quantity of channels available.

Aspire A Aspire B

Program 10-03 PRI PCB Setup� 10-03-01 = Mode 4� 10-03-03 = CRC-4 ON� 10-03-10 = Master� 10-03-11 = 1

Program 10-03 PRI PCB Setup� 10-03-01 = Mode 4� 10-03-03 = CRC-4 ON� 10-03-10 = Slave� 10-03-11 = 1


ID=1



2-pair twisted cable

Aspire A Aspire B

Networking ◆ 239


VoIP Networking ExampleAspire IP Networking requires the Aspire M/L/XL NTCPU PCB with a Feature Upgrade PAL or Enhanced PAL chip and a VOIPU PCB. The Aspire S can also be used for IP Networking and requires an ENTU LAN card and a VOIPU PCB. The VOIPU PCB provides the speech resources. For further detail on Aspire IP operation refer to the Aspire IP Manual.

The example below shows two Aspire systems, each has a VOIPU card installed. The NTCPU and VOIPU PCB�s are connected to a hub via a standard LAN patch cable. Aspire A has extension numbers in the range 300-399, Aspire B has 400-499.

Refer to Multi-Site Networking (page 31) for an example of setting up an multi-site network using ISDN or IP connections.

Aspire A Aspire B

Hub

NTCPU NTCPU

VOIPU VOIPU

240 ◆ Networking


After programming, each system must be reset in order for the IP address changes to take affect.

Aspire A Aspire B

Program 10-12-01� IP Address of the NTCPU = 172.16.0.10Program 10-12-02� Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0Program 10-12-03� Default Gateway = 192.168.1.100

(this is the router�s inside address)The installation site�s IT personnel

should be able to provide these IP addresses.

Program 10-12-01� IP Address of the NTCPU = 172.16.0.11Program 10-12-02� Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0Program 10-12-03� Default Gateway = 192.168.1.100



Program 10-20-01 TCP Port Setup� Device 4 = 30000


Program 10-27-01 Destination IP Address (as entered in Aspire B�s Program 10-12-01) and port number for each ID� ID 1 = IP Address 172.16.0.11� Procedure port must be set to 1730

Program 10-27-01 Destination IP Address (as entered in Aspire A�s Program 10-12-01) and port number for each ID� ID 1 = IP Address 172.16.0.10� Procedure port must be set to 1730


ID=1



Program 20-01-04 BLF Refresh Rate� BLF Refresh Rate = 30

For Hotline lamping over the network.


For Hotline lamping over the network.Program 84-05-01 (VOIPU card in slot 2)� IP Address of the VOIPU PCB =

172.16.0.21The installation site�s IT personnel


Program 84-05-01 (VOIPU card in slot 3)� IP Address of the VOIPU PCB =



Program 84-06-01 VOIPU Setup� DTMF Behavior = 2 (Out of Band)


Program 84-12-31 H.323 Phone CODEC� DTMF Relay Mode = 1 (RFC2833)


Program 84-02-35 Fast Start� Enable Fast Start


Networking ◆ 241


Explanation of routing for IP NetworkingWhen a user places a call to a remote extension number the dialled digits are checked against the Numbering Scheme in Program 11-01. This will provide the Node ID number of the route to the remote system.

The Aspire will then Þnd the destination IP Address by searching Program 10-27 for the destination IP Address for the given Node ID number.

Quantity of Voice Paths AvailableThe quantity of voice calls that can be made at any one time are dependent on various factors.

● VOIPU Resource - A free VOIPU resource must be available at each Aspire system.

● Program 10-19 : The mode of each VOIPU resource can be conÞgured, modes 0 (ICM/Trunk) or 3 (NTW) can be used by Aspire Networking calls.

● IP Network Bandwidth Restrictions - These limitations are beyond the scope of the Aspire. If there is not enough bandwidth available the call can not be maintained.

VOIPU PCB IP Address OptionsIn the example above a static IP address is assigned to the VOIPU PCB. The IP address can be assigned by DHCP by setting Program 84-04-01.

242 ◆ Networking


Multi-Site Networking ExampleAspire Multi-Site Networking is a network of three or more Aspire systems. The network can con-sist of either Aspire ISDN or Aspire IP network connections.

The example below shows three Aspire systems, each has a VOIPU card installed. The NTCPU and VOIPU PCB�s are connected to a hub via a standard LAN patch cable.

Aspire A has extension numbers in the range 200-299, Aspire B has 300-399, and Aspire C has 400-499.

Aspire A Aspire B

Hub

NTCPU NTCPU

VOIPU VOIPU

Aspire C

NTCPU VOIPU

Networking ◆ 243


Pr�

Pr�Pr�

l

Pr�Pr(a10�

�

s

Pr��

�

,

,

Pr�

k.Pr�

)

l

Pr�Pr�Pr�

After programming, each system must be reset in order for the IP address changes to take affect.

VOIPU PCB�sIn the example above the VOIPU is in a different slot number in each system. This is only to sim-plify the example, since at default each slot is assigned a different IP address in Program 84-05-01.

In practice the IP address of the VOIPU PCB will be changed from default to an address within the customer�s network range. Therefore, the VOIPU can be installed into any slot.

Aspire A Aspire B Aspire C

ogram 10-12-01IP Address of the NTCPU = 172.16.0.10

ogram 10-12-02Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0

ogram 10-12-03Default Gateway = 192.168.1.100 (this is the router�s inside address)

The installation site�s IT personnel should be able to provide these IP addresses.

Program 10-12-01� IP Address of the NTCPU =

172.16.0.11Program 10-12-02� Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0Program 10-12-03� Default Gateway = 192.168.1.100



Program 10-12-01� IP Address of the NTCPU =

172.16.0.12Program 10-12-02� Subnet Mask = 255.255.0.0Program 10-12-03� Default Gateway = 192.168.1.100

(this is the router�s inside address)The installation site�s IT personne


ogram 10-20-01 TCP Port SetupDevice 4 = 30000



ogram 10-27-01 Destination IP Address s entered in Aspire B and C�s Program -12-01) and port number for each IDID 1 = IP Address 172.16.0.11Procedure port must be set to 1730ID 2 = IP Address 172.16.0.12Procedure port must be set to 1730

Program 10-27-01 Destination IP Address (as entered in Aspire A and C�s Program 10-12-01) and port number for each ID� ID 1 = IP Address 172.16.0.10

Procedure port must be set to 1730� ID 2 = IP Address 172.16.0.12

Procedure port must be set to 1730

Program 10-27-01 Destination IP Addres(as entered in Aspire A and B�s Program 10-12-01) and port number for each ID� ID 1 = IP Address 172.16.0.10

Procedure port must be set to 1730� ID 2 = IP Address 172.16.0.11

Procedure port must be set to 1730ogram 11-01-01 System Numbering

Dial 2x = 3 digit, Type 2 (Intercom)Dial 3x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking), ID=1Dial 4x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking), ID=2


ID=1� Dial 3x = 3 digit, Type 2 (Intercom)� Dial 4x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking),

ID=2

Program 11-01-01 System Numbering� Dial 2x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking)

ID=1� Dial 3x = 3 digit, Type 8 (Networking)


ogram 20-01-04 BLF Refresh RateBLF Refresh Rate = 30





For Hotline lamping over the networogram 84-05-01 (VOIPU card in slot 2)

IP Address of the VOIPU PCB =172.16.0.21

The installation site�s IT personnel should be able to provide these IP addresses.

Program 84-05-01 (VOIPU card in slot 3)� IP Address of the VOIPU PCB =



Program 84-05-01 (VOIPU card in slot 4� IP Address of the VOIPU PCB =

172.16.0.23The installation site�s IT personne


ogram 84-06-01 VOIPU SetupDTMF Behavior = 2 (Out of Band)



ogram 84-12-31 H.323 Phone CODECDTMF Relay Mode = 1 (RFC2833)



ogram 84-02-35 Fast StartEnable Fast Start



244 ◆ Networking

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484

Tel: 800-365-1928 Fax: 203-926-5458www.necunifiedsolutions.com

Other Important Telephone Numbers

Sales: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5450Customer Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5444Customer Service FAX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5454Technical Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-925-8801Discontinued Product Service: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .900-990-2541Technical Training: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203-926-5430Emergency Technical Service (After Hours) . . . . . . . .203-929-7920

(Excludes discontinued products)

(0893207)June 19, 2006, Rev 3 Printed in U.S.A.

NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484

TEL: 203-926-5400 FAX: 203-929-0535www.necunifiedsolutions.com

networking manualws1.necii.com/support/downloads/aspire/software/0893207_rev3.pdf · about aspire...

Documents